Warehouse Management
Warehouse Management
Warehouse Management
1
BPCS
WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT
V5.0
RUN INSTRUCTIONS
Document: SSARUN34
Revision Date: 01/04/95
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Copyright (c) 1995 SSA, Inc.
Chicago, Illinois, U.S.A.
15/08/17 Page
2
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
SSA has made every effort to ensure the accuracy of the
material contained herein; nevertheless, the material may
contain factual or typographical errors. If you have any
questions or comments, please call or write:
SSA International HelpLine
System Software Associates, Inc.
500 W. Madison Street
Chicago, Illinois 60661
Telephone: (312) 258-6000
Facsimile: (312) 641-0131
This material contains SSA confidential and proprietary
information. The unauthorized possession, use, reproduction,
distribution, display, or disclosure of this material or the
information contained herein is prohibited.
Copyright 1995 System Software Associates, Inc.
All rights reserved.
15/08/17 Page
3
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
OVERVIEW
15/08/17 Page
4
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
General Instructions
This document is divided into the following sections:
* a) PRODUCT OVERVIEW: This section provides a
general description of the functions and highlights of the
product.
* b) PRODUCT FLOW: This section describes
prerequisites for operating the product, the sequence in which
the programs should be run, and the functions of this product.
* c) HOW-TO INDEX: This section is an
alphabetical list of product functions. Next to each function
is the number of the program to use.
* d) GLOSSARY: This section provides
explanations of the terms pertinent to this product.
* e) PROCESSING OPTIONS: This section explains
standard processing options used throughout the Run
Instructions.
* f) COMMONLY USED TERMS: This section defines
commonly used terminology used throughout the Run Instructions.
* g) MENUS: This section displays all the menus
associated with the product. The program numbers are in
parentheses to the right of the program name on the menus.
* h) RUN INSTRUCTIONS: The actual operating
instructions for the product, appearing in the program sequence
described in the Flow section. Each program is further
discussed in three sections: OVERVIEW, FIELD DESCRIPTIONS, and
AVAILABLE FUNCTION KEYS.
15/08/17 Page
5
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Product Overview
Effective management of warehouse resources is a crucial
component of key operating strategies. In an age in which
responsiveness is as important as capital, all aspects of
warehousing must be managed to reduce both cycle times and
costs. Streamlined warehouse processes, from receiving and
putaway to order fulfillment and development, rely on efficient
use of space, manpower, equipment, inventory, information and
time. Fundamental processes for effective warehouse management
include:
Definition of warehouse geographies that
optimize the use of limited space for efficient storage and
movement of goods.
Scheduling of warehouse activities to
facilitate cost effective use of material handling manpower and
equipment.
Flexible, automated selection of warehouse
locations for putaway and picking to help minimize order cycle
times.
Effective management of warehouse inventory
through automated replenishment of picking locations and
streamlined internal material movement activities.
BPCS Warehouse Management (WHM) addresses the warehouse product
flow and control requirements of manufacturers and distributors
alike. Fully integrated with BPCS Purchasing, Inventory
Control, Order Management, Billing and Distribution Resource
Planning applications, WHM supports warehouse issues from the
scheduling of receipts through the staging and shipment of
goods to customers.
15/08/17 Page
6
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Product Highlights
User-defined Warehouse Geography allows locations to be
identified in two or three dimensional axes such as Aisle, Bay
and Level.
Scheduled Goods Receiving allows the creation, maintenance,
cancelation and receipt of delivery bookings that group items
together for receiving at a specified date and time .
Automated Putaway Location Selection is achieved using
item/warehouse specific requirements filtered through a putaway
location selection hierarchy.
Flexible Picking Controls include a comprehensive set of
picking alternatives with which to effectively manage the pick
process.
Automatic Replenishment automatically monitors stock levels at
each dedicated picking location and triggers a replenishment
order when the minimum quantity threshold defined for an
item/warehouse combination is reached.
Warehouse Administration effectively manages internal warehouse
activities and resources such as stock movement, transfers and
status and tracking functions.
Other files which work in conjuction with Warehouse Management:
Inventory (Item Master, Warehouse Master,
Location Master, Lot Master, Location Inventory, Transaction
History)
Order Management (Order Header and Order
Lines, Customer Master)
Purchasing (Purchase Order Header and
Purchase Order Lines)
15/08/17 Page
7
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Product Flow
Warehouse Master (INV110):
Allows you to define managed warehouses and enter parameters
that determine the warehouse's characteristics.
Warehouse Geography (WHM100):
Allows you to create and maintain Warehouse Geography records.
Group Location Maintenance (WHM120):
Allows you to maintain a range of locations as a group within a
warehouse and can also handle exceptions.
Location Maintenance (INV170):
Allows you to maintain locations within a warehouse.
Pallet Type (WHM110):
Allows you to define and maintain a table of Pallet Types.
These types can then be attached to Item/Warehouse records to
help identify which items may be placed in particular locations
in the warehouse.
Goods Receiving Code (WHM130):
Allows you to define and maintain a table of Goods Receiving
Codes. These codes may then be attached to any items that
require special goods receiving requirements.
Picking Select Code (WHM140):
Allows you to define and maintain a table of Picking Select
Codes. These codes may then be attached to any items that
require special picking conditions.
15/08/17 Page
8
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Inventory Status Code (WHM160):
Allows you to define and maintain a table of Inventory Status
Codes and to display the reserved status codes (0-9).
Location Status Code (WHM170):
Allows you to maintain Location Status Codes.
Item/Warehouse Master (WHM150):
Allows details of the Flexibility Table for the item to be
defined. This table is used during the putaway process, before
the putaway algorithm is invoked.
Booking-In (WHM500):
Allows you to create, maintain and cancel delivery bookings
within the Warehouse Management System.
Goods Receiving (WHM510):
Allows you to receive goods into the warehouse, grouped
together by a common delivery number. The delivery may span
several order numbers. The functionality in this program is the
equivalent of Purcahse Order Receipts (PUR550) and Resupply
Order Receipts (DRP550).
Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance (WHM650):
Allows you to create and maintain Unscheduled Receipts.
Unscheduled Receipt numbers are automatically assigned to newly
created Unscheduled Receipts.
Putaway (WHM620):
Allows you to select pallets to be put away. This program would
normally be used if stock was not put away from Goods Receiving
(WHM510) or if stock was first put away to an Inspection
Location.
15/08/17 Page
9
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Manual Stock Movement (WHM560):
Allows you to move pallets within a managed warehouse.
Movements from an off-site location can be processed as a
movement to an intermediate receiving location, then to a main
storage location.
Inter-Warehouse Transfers (WHM550):
Allows you to move stock between two warehouses, one of which
must be a managed warehouse. It may also be used to split
pallets by moving part of a pallet within the same warehouse.
Movement Confirm (WHM520):
Allows you to confirm any stock movement within a managed
warehouse. This includes Putaway, Manual Movements,
Inter-Warehouse Transfers and Replenishments.
Picking Select/Print (WHM530):
Allows you to enter the selection criteria by which order lines
may be selected for picking.
Manual Replenishment (WHM570):
Allows you to manually replenish Picking or Replenishment
locations within the warehouse, overriding automatic
replenishment. This program would normally be used only
following a stock adjustment at the location, as picking would
normally generate Replenishment instructions if required.
Pick Confirm (WHM540):
Allows you to manually confirm pick lists requested using Pick
Select/Print (WHM530). If Pick Confirmation = 0 for the
warehouse, then pick lists are automatically confirmed and the
pick list confirmation process is not required. This program
will be used only if you specified picking confirmation at the
warehouse level.
15/08/17 Page
10
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Ship Confirm (ORD570):
Allows you to confirm the actual quantity (and lot/location) of
inventory shipped, as opposed to the quantity picked.
Print Shipping Documents (ORD590):
Allows you to print the shipping documents including packing
lists and bills of lading.
Inventory Status (WHM580):
Allows you to amend the status of pallet inventory held within
the warehouse. Individual pallets may be accessed discreetly by
UPI (Unique Pallet Identifier), or processing may be by Item
Number/Location. In the latter case all pallets for that item
at the specified location are processed.
Location Status (WHM590):
Allows you to amend the status of Main Storage locations within
the warehouse. The status of stock within these locations can
be maintained at pallet level as well.
Inventory Transaction Post (WHM610):
Allows you to enter Inventory Transactions for stock held
within a managed warehouse. This program should be used instead
of Inventory Transacation Processing (INV500) for managed
warehouses. This program will be used mainly for Inventory
adjustments and Opening Balance transactions.
PO Manual Close (WHM680):
Allows you to manually close Purchase Orders that have been
created for managed warehouses. This relates to the quantity
received for the Purchase Order. The Purchase Order may still
be costed if necessary.
UR Manual Close (WHM690):
Allows you to manually close Unscheduled Receipts that have
15/08/17 Page
11
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
been created for managed warehouses. Unlike a Purchase Order,
this completes the processing for the Unscheduled Receipt as
Unscheduled Receipts are not costed.
Clear Unscheduled Receipts (WHM920):
Allows you to delete Unscheduled Receipts that have been in the
system for more than a specified number of days.
Stock Count Worksheets (WHM311):
Allows you to select Stock Count Worksheets. You may select by
Item, Location or Item Class for a given warehouse.
Unposted Stock Counts (WHM312):
Allows you to list all Stock Count Worksheet selections for the
warehouse entered that have not yet been posted using Stock
Count Post (WHM640).
Stock Count Post (WHM640):
Allows you to enter Stock Count details on to the system once
the stock has been physically counted and written on the Stock
Count Worksheets. If the warehouse uses One-Step stock
counting, then the Inventory levels are adjusted immediately.
If the warehouse is using Two-Step stock counting, then
Inventory levels are adjusted using Inventory Transaction Post.
Stock Count Variance Report (WHM250):
Allows you to request the Stock Count Variance Report. This
details the differences between the Stock Count post quantity
and the Book quantity. It is run by warehouse and selection may
also be made by Stock Count Posted Date.
Stock Count Purge (WHM830):
This program has two functions. The first is to clear down
unposted records from the Stock Count file prior to selecting
Stock Count Worksheets to print. The second function is to
15/08/17 Page
12
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
physically purge old Stock Count Records.
Warehouse Management data is contained in the following files:
File Text
ICT Pallet Type Codes
IDD Delivery Detail
IDH Delivery Header
IGR Goods Receiving Codes
IIE Item Extension File
IIS Inventory Status Codes
IIW Item/Warehouse File
ILE Location Extension File
ILS Location Status Codes
IMP Multiple Location Picking
IPI Pallet Inventory
IPL Picking Load File
IPP Pick List File
IPS Picking Select Codes
IRD Unscheduled Receipts Detail
IRH Unscheduled Receipts Header
ISI Stock Count File
IWE Warehouse Extension File
IWG Warehouse Geography File
IW1 Movement Work File
IW2 Replenishment/Picking Linkage
IW3 Group Location Range Work File
IW4 Picking Work File
IW5 Billing Work File
IW6 Picking Select Work File
15/08/17 Page
13
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
How-To Index
Function Program
Booking-In WHM500
Clear Unscheduled Receipts WHM920
Confirm Movement WHM520
Pallet Type WHM110
Delivery Inquiry WHM300
Goods Receiving WHM510
Goods Receiving Code WHM130
Inter-warehouse Transfers WHM550
Inventory Status WHM580
Inventory Status Code WHM160
Inventory Transaction Post WHM610
Load Inquiry WHM320
Location Status WHM590
Location Status Code WHM170
Maintain Group Location WHM120
Maintain Item Master INV100
Maintain Item/Warehouse Master WHM150
Maintain Locations INV170
Maintain Unscheduled Receipts WHM650
Maintain Warehouse Master INV110
Manual P.O. Close WHM680
Manual Replenishment WHM570
Manual Stock Movements WHM560
Manual U.R. Close WHM690
Material Status Inquiry INV300
Pick Confirm WHM540
Picking Select Code WHM140
Picking Select/Print WHM530
Print Shipping Documents ORD590
Putaway WHM620
Ship Confirm ORD570
Stock Inquiry WHM310
Warehouse Geography WHM100
15/08/17 Page
14
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Glossary
The following terms are used in this product:
"Booking-In"
The process of scheduling the arrival of deliveries within a
warehouse. This may take place in advance of the goods being
physically received, or may take place at the same time.
"Check Digit"
A number, calculated using Modulus 23 in the default program
WHM522, to assure that the proper from and to locations are
entered at confirmation. This is controlled by the confirmation
parameter being set to '2' at the confirmed warehouse.
"Check-In Note"
A document printed for a delivery. It would typically be used
to check stock against a delivery as it was unloaded from a
truck.
"Confirmation"
The process of informing the system that a movement instruction
has been completed. Warehouse Management supports five types of
movement: Picking, Replenishment, Manual Movement,
Inter-Warehouse Transfer and Putaway. Depending on the
parameters set, each may be considered complete at the time
that the movement was initiated, or may be manually confirmed,
once the movement has been completed.
"Consolidation"
The process of preparing orders for shipping. Separate order
lines may appear on separate pick lists and may therefore
require consolidation. This is not to be confused with
Consolidation processing within the Order Processing product.
15/08/17 Page
15
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
"Delivery"
The means of identifying the arrival of goods at a warehouse by
a single number. A delivery may consist of Purchase Orders,
Resupply Orders and Unscheduled Receipts, or a combination
thereof.
"Flexibility Table"
Used in putaway to put restrictions on the Location, Zone and
Location Category to which goods may be moved.
"Inter-Warehouse Transfer"
The movement of stock from one warehouse to another. One of the
warehouses involved in the process must be a managed warehouse.
"Inventory Item"
The means of defining the products stored and moved within the
warehouse.
"Load"
A unique Load Number is assigned to each combination of
Route/Carrier/Request Date/Customer/Ship-to contained within a
Pick List. Once all lines within a load have been picked, then
the load is ready for shipment.
"Managed Warehouse"
Pro-active. When stock is received into the warehouse, the
system suggests where it may be stored.
"Movement Ticket"
A document instructing the warehouse operative to move stock
from one location to another.
"Non-Managed Warehouse"
Reactive. The system is used to record inventory adjustment or
15/08/17 Page
16
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
movements after they have taken place.
"Pallet"
The means by which stock is moved around the warehouse. The use
of Pallets within Warehouse Management is not to be confused
with the Containers used within the Advanced Process Industries
product. Warehouse Management does NOT support Container level
inventory. A Container controlled item may not be used in a WHM
managed warehouse.
"Pallet Label"
A means of physically indentifying Pallets stored within the
warehouse.
"Picking"
The picking of items from the warehouse to satisfy Customer
Orders. Warehouse Management supports both unique picking
locations, as well as picking from main storage. However,
Warehouse Management does not allow the picking of items for
Shop Orders and does not report Assortments and Kits. Each Pick
List request is assigned a unique Pick List number.
"Putaway"
The process of moving stock from a receiving area to main
storage. Warehouse management supports both manual and
automatic putaway. Manual putaway means the warehouse operative
enters the main storage location for the stock.
"Receiving"
The process of recording the arrival of a delivery at a
warehouse. The system records the stock as having arrived in a
receiving area.
"Replenishment"
The process of moving stock from main storage to the picking
15/08/17 Page
17
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
area, thus ensuring that sufficient stock is always kept in the
picking area.
"Reservation"
A form of allocation at the pallet level. Warehouse management
allows for individual pallets to be reserved, as well as a
phantom location that is defined in the WHM600 system
parameters to contain the reservations until WHM530 Picking
Selection is run. The original reservations are generated for
those warehouses with the reservations flag set to '1'.
"Stock Counting"
The physical checking of inventory levels for a section of the
warehouse against the inventory recorded on the system.
"Stock Rotation"
The sequence that stock 'flows' through the warehouse.
Warehouse Management currently supports two Stock Rotation
methods, FIFO (First In, First Out) and FEFO (First Expiry,
First Out).
"Storage Level"
The levels of inventory recorded within the system. Five levels
of inventory are considered. For example: Pallets, Layers,
Outers, Inners and Units.
"Unique Pallet Identifier (UPI)"
Means of identifying the pallet that inventory is stored on/in.
Sometimes referred to as a Pallet Number.
"Unscheduled Receipt"
The arrival of items at the warehouse without documentation.
Within Warehouse Management, Unscheduled Receipts are treated
as Purchase Orders that do not require costing.
15/08/17 Page
18
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
"Warehouse"
The building where stock is stored. Managed Warehouses are
always physical warehouses.
"Warehouse Geography"
The process of recording the warehouse layout using Warehouse
Management.
15/08/17 Page
19
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Processing Options
The following processing options perform the indicated
functions throughout the product, unless otherwise noted in the
individual program. Each option is performed by pressing the
indicated function key, except for ENTER.
ENTER
When in a maintenance function, ENTER proceeds to the next
panel of the program; if at the final panel, BPCS updates the
file and return to the first panel of the program for any
additional maintenance functions.
ENTER
When in a print (listing) function, ENTER submits the program
to the workstation's default batch queue for processing. A
batch queue is a list of jobs waiting to be processed on a
"first-come, first-served" basis. A job can be any program or
procedure that is waiting to be executed along with all of the
necessary input data, processing attributes, and output
information.
F1
Displays the help text for any program.
F3
Exits the program without recording, updating, or printing any
information entered on the program's panels.
F7
Rolls backward, displaying previous records (those
15/08/17 Page
20
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
alphanumerically closer to "A" or those with earlier dates).
F8
Rolls forward, displaying additional records (those
alphanumerically closer to "Z" or "9" or those with later
dates).
F9
Places the system in "ADD" mode during maintenance procedures.
Press ENTER after placing the system in ADD mode to continue to
a second panel (if such exists) or to accept the information
being added.
F10
Places the system in "UPDATE" mode during maintenance
procedures. Press ENTER after placing the system in UPDATE mode
to continue to a second panel (if such exists) or to accept the
information being updated.
F11
"Folds" a panel to display additional detail information. This
option usually appears on a panel which is displaying summary
line information, and when used, "folds" the panel to display
additional line items, such as quantity, description, etc. When
pressed again, F11 returns the panel to its first "summary"
display. F11 continues to switch back and forth between these
panels.
F12
Rolls back to the prior panel of the program. Any information
keyed on the current panel is not saved.
15/08/17 Page
21
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F13
Switches between two modes of a display (Unless otherwise
noted). If more than two possible modes exist, F13 displays a
window where selection of mode may be made.
F15
(When available) places the system in COPY mode. This function
allows you to specify a record to be copied and a new record to
be created. Changes may then be made to the new record.
F18
Submits a program for interactive processing (Unless otherwise
noted). The workstation submits the job directly to the central
processing utility and waits for a response just as it does
when executing any other on-line procedure, such as selecting a
menu option.
Occasionally, this causes the system to execute the job more
quickly than if it were submitted for batch queue processing;
however, your workstation is dedicated to that job and cannot
be used for any other processing until the interactive job has
been executed. If you submit an interactive processing job when
the system is in heavy use, your terminal could be "occupied"
for many minutes; therefore, use this command only when the
printed listing must be processed quickly and other processing
does not take priority.
F21
Places the system in "DELETE" mode during maintenance
procedures. Press ENTER through all subsequent panels to fully
delete the particular item. In most cases, BPCS performs a
logical delete, meaning that the deleted information is still
on the system and may be reactivated at a later time, if
necessary.
15/08/17 Page
22
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F22
Places the system in "REACTIVATE" mode during maintenance
procedures. Press ENTER through all subsequent panels to fully
reactivate the particular item. Items previously deleted using
F21 above may be reactivated through this function.
F23
Displays additional action codes available for this panel.
F24
Displays additional function keys available for this panel.
In certain cases, BPCS may display a message including a
function key to confirm an action to be taken. The action being
confirmed is usually of greater consequence than others;
therefore, use caution in using the designated function key.
15/08/17 Page
23
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Commonly Used Terms
"Reference only."
This term indicates that the given field's information is used
only for reference throughout the product and does not affect
processing in any way.
"Extreme values by default."
This term indicates that the given field's information defaults
to an alphanumeric or numeric extreme, if not overridden.
Usually used in designating ranges, use of system defaults
indicates that all information which could be included in the
range is included. The defaults (or any other entries)
specified in designating a range do not have to be valid codes
within the product for their usage here.
"(Y/blank)"
This term is used when a field requires a "Y" to set a flag,
indicating to the system that the particular action described
is to take place. Otherwise, the field should remain without an
entry (blank). In some cases, however, the field requires
either a "Y" or an "N"; these cases are indicated with the term
"(Y/N)".
"Ranges"
This term is used within the field descriptions for listing
programs, reports and inquiries. It means that you have the
option to enter a lower and upper value of a certain number or
code (for example, a lower and upper employee number). In this
way, you can designate those codes for which you want to print
a listing, report, or show an inquiry. This set of codes is
known as a "range" of values. BPCS always inserts extreme
values by default in the lower and upper fields (see "Extreme
values by default" above.) When you make entries into these
fields, they do not need to be valid codes already set up on
15/08/17 Page
24
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
the particular file.
Panel Display Characters
The actual display panels from the product have been reproduced
in this document using standardized characters. These
characters represent the data that normally appears on these
panels, and illustrates the relative size of each field on the
panel: an "a" represents an operator input of lower-case or
upper-case letters or numbers, an "A" represents an operator
input of upper-case letters only or numbers, an "n" represents
an operator input of numbers, and "x" represents an output data
display. Occasionally, some descriptive information is imbedded
in an output display of "x's".
"Alphanumeric"
Refers to text which contains letters, letters and numbers
mixed, and numbers arranged uniformly with special characters
(such as dates in MM/DD/YY) format). Reports and inquiries in
this product are sorted in ascending alphanumeric order, unless
indicated otherwise. ("Ascending" rearranges items from the
lowest value to the highest value.) Alphanumeric text is sorted
in ascending order according to the following rules:
Special characters ($, %, hyphen (-), comma
and period) come before all others.
Lowercase letters come before uppercase
letters.
Uppercase letters come before numbers.
Numbers (0 - 9) come last.
"A/R, A/P, G/L"
These abbreviations are used throughout the documentation to
denote the terms Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, and
General Ledger, respectively. This distinguishes them from the
corresponding program indicators of ACR, ACP, and GLD,
respectively, which precede program numbers (for example,
ACR500, ACP100, GLD500, etc.).
15/08/17 Page
25
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Menus
Warehouse Management Main Menu - WHM
From these menus, you can select a specific menu option or
choose to display another menu. You can select specific menu
options by keying the appropriate menu option number into the
"Enter Option" field. You may display the menu for another
product by keying in the three-character sequence that
identifies the product, such as 'CST 'for the Cost Accounting
Menu (CST).
You can access the Warehouse Management Main Menu (WHM) by
entering 'WHM' into the "Enter Option" field from any other
menu in BPCS.
15/08/17 Page
26
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* SYS500-06 *** BPCS 5.00.02 Environment *** WSID
9/12/94 *
* WHM Warehouse Management USID
14:31:3
*
* Enter Menu Name, Program Name, or Option Number
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Select
* Transactions
* 2 Booking-In
WHM500C
* 3 Goods Receiving
WHM510C
* 4 Movement Confirm
WHM520D
* 5 Picking Select/Print
WHM530C
* 6 Pick Confirm
WHM540C
* 7 Ship Confirm
ORD570
* 8 Print Shipping Documents
ORD590
* 9 Manual Stock Movement
WHM560C
* 10 Manual Replenishment
WHM570C
* 11 Inventory Status
WHM580C
* 12 Location Status
WHM590C
* 13 Inventory Transaction Post
WHM610C
* 14 Putaway
WHM620D
* 15 Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance
WHM650B
* 16 Inter-Warehouse Transfers
WHM550D
* Inquiries
* 20 Delivery Inquiry
WHM300D
* 21 Stock Inquiry
WHM310D
* 22 Load Inquiry
WHM320C
* 23 Material Status Inquiry
INV300C
* Reports
* 26 Load Status (Summary)
WHM210D
* 27 Consolidation of Stock
WHM220C
* 28 Inventory Status
WHM230C
* 29 Location Status
WHM240C
* Other Options
* 40 Warehouse Management File Maintenance Menu (Menu) WHM01
* 41 Warehouse Management Inventory Menu (Menu) WHM02
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel F13=Functions
F21=Command Line
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
15/08/17 Page
27
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
The Warehouse Management Main Menu (WHM) provides access to:
Booking-In, Goods Receiving, Inventory and
Load Status, Stock Movement and Shipping Documents
Listings of stock, inventory status,
location status and cycle count information
Warehouse File Maintenance (WHM01) and
Warehouse Inventory Menu (WHM02)
15/08/17 Page
28
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Management Maintenance Menu - WHM01
15/08/17 Page
29
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* SYS500-06 *** BPCS 5.00.02 Environment *** WSID
9/12/94 *
* WHM01 Warehouse Management File Maintenance USID
14:35:5
*
* Enter Menu Name, Program Name, or Option Number
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Select
* File Maintenance
* 2 Warehouse Master
INV110D1
* 3 Warehouse Geography
WHM100C
* 4 Pallet Type
WHM110C
* 5 Group Location Maintenance
WHM120C
* 6 Location Maintenance
INV170D1
* 7 Goods Receiving Code
WHM130C
* 8 Picking Select Code
WHM140C
* 9 Item Master
INV100D1
* 10 Item/Warehouse Master
WHM150C
* 11 Inventory Status Code
WHM160C
* 12 Location Status Code
WHM170C
* Close Programs
* 16 P.O. Manual Close
WHM680C
* 17 U.R. Manual Close
WHM690C
* 18 Clear Unscheduled Receipts
WHM920D
* File Listings
* 21 Warehouse Master
INV115D
* 22 Warehouse Geography
WHM105C
* 23 Pallet Type
WHM115C
*
* 25 Location Master
INV175D
* 26 Goods Receiving Code
WHM135C
* 27 Picking Select Code
WHM145C
* 28 Item Master
INV105D
* 29 Item/Warehouse Master
WHM155C
* 30 Inventory Status Code
WHM165C
* 31 Location Status Code
WHM175C
* Other Options
* 40 Warehouse Management Main Menu (Menu) WHM
* 41 Warehouse Management Inventory Menu (Menu) WHM02
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel F13=Functions
F21=Command Line
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
15/08/17 Page
30
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
The Warehouse Management File Maintenance Menu (WHM01) provides
access to:
Warehouse Master, Warehouse Geography,
Group Location Maintenance, Location Master
Warehouse Management Main Menu (WHM) and
Warehouse Management Inventory Menu (WHM02)
15/08/17 Page
31
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Management Inventory MenuWHM02
*************************************************************************
*******
* SYS500-06 *** BPCS 5.00.02 Environment *** WSID
9/12/94 *
* WHM02 Warehouse Management Inventory USID
14:38:5
*
* Enter Menu Name, Program Name, or Option Number
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Select
* Stock Counting
* 2 Stock Count Worksheets
WHM311C
* 3 Unposted Stock Counts
WHM312C
* 4 Stock Count Post
WHM640C
* 5 Stock Count Var Report
WHM250C
* 6 Inventory Transaction
WHM610C
* 7 Stock Count Purge
WHM830C
* Other Options
* 41 Warehouse Management Main Menu (Menu) WHM
* 42 Warehouse Management File Maintenance Menu (Menu) WHM01
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel F13=Functions
F21=Command Line
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
The Warehouse Management Inventory Menu (WHM02) provides access
to:
Stock Count Variance Report, Stock Count
Worksheet, Inventory Transactions and Stock Count Purge
Warehouse Management Main Menu (WHM) and
Warehouse Management File Maintenance Menu (WHM01)
15/08/17 Page
32
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
15/08/17 Page
33
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Parameters Generation
The parameters for Warehouse Management processing are
established in the System Parameters program (SYS800). This
program allows you to maintain System Parameters for your
current BPCS environment.
ACCESS: System Functions Menu (SYS)
15/08/17 Page
34
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Installed Products FormatSYS821D-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* SYS821D-01 BPCS System Generation WSID
MM/DD/Y
* Display Installed Products Format USID
HH:MM:S
*
* Accounts Payable ACP n Inventory INV
n
* Accounts Receivable ACR n JIT Repetitive JIT
n
*Advanced Process Industries API n Laboratory Management LMS
n
* Billing BIL n Multi-Currency MLT
n
* Mfg Data Management BOM n Master Production Schedule MPS
n
* Capacity Planning CAP n Multi-Facility System MFS
n
* Cash Management CSH n Material Requirements MRP
n
* Cost Accounting CST n Order Processing ORD
n
* Currency Translation CTR n Payroll PAY
n
* CIMPath CIM n Planners Assistant PLN
n
* Dist Resources Planning DRP n Performance Measurement PRF
n
* Financial Assistant FIN n Promotions & Deals PRO
n
* Forecasting FOR n Purchasing PUR
n
* Formulation Assistant FRM n Quality Management QMS
n
* Fixed Assets FXA n Shop Floor Control SFC
n
* General Ledger GLD n Warehouse Management WHM
n
*
* Note 1 BPCS Product is Installed on this System.
* 0 BPCS Product is not Installed on this System.
* F1=Help F3=Exit
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Installed Products Format Panel
Warehouse Management (1,A):
Enter Y if Warehouse Management is to be used in this
environment. Enter N if Warehouse Management is not to be used
in this environment. If N is entered, then it will not be
possible to define a Warehouse as a managed warehouse and hence
Warehouse Management will not be available.
15/08/17 Page
35
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Management Parameters - WHM820D-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM820D-01 BPCS System Generation PC2047S1
10/09/93 *
* CPU Warehouse Management Parameters SCHLAG
14:23:02 *
* X,Y,Z X,Y
*
* Aisle Description Aisle Code Length 2 2
*
* Bay Description Bay Code Length 2 4
*
* Level Description Level Code Length 2
*
*
*
* Storage Level 4 Description Inners
*
* Storage Level 3 Description Outers
*
* Storage Level 2 Description Layers
*
* Storage Level 1 Description Pallets
*
*
*
* Confirm Putaway 0 (0=No, 1=Yes, 2=By Check
Digit) *
* Confirm Picking 0 (0=No, 1=Yes, 2=By Check
Digit) *
* Confirm Replenishment 0 (0=No, 1=Yes, 2=By Check
Digit) *
* Confirm Movements 0 (0=No, 1=Yes, 2=By Check
Digit) *
* Confirm Ship 0 (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Check Digit Algorithm WHM522
*
* Show Inter Warehouse Prompt After SO Receipt 1 (0=No,
1=Yes) *
* Picking Type 0 (0=Main Storage, 1=Pick Face, 2=Two Tier)
*
* Unscheduled Receipts Last Number Used 1
*
* Number of Days to Keep Receipt 90
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F15=Installed Products
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - WHM820D-01
Aisle Description (9,A):
Enter the aisle description to be used as the field description
by Warehouse Master Maintenance (INV110).
15/08/17 Page
36
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Bay Description (9,A):
Enter the bay description to be used as the field description
by Warehouse Master Maintenance (INV110).
Level Description (9,A):
Enter the level description to be used as the field description
by Warehouse Master Maintenance (INV110).
Code Length (X,Y,Z) (1,A):
Enter the default code lengths for Aisle, Bay and Level. Each
code length must be greater than 0 and together must total 6.
Warehouse Master Maintenance (INV110) uses these values as
defaults.
Code Length (X,Y) (1,A):
Enter the default code lengths for Aisle, Bay and Level. Each
code length must be greater than 0 and together must total 6.
Warehouse Master Maintenance (INV110) uses these values as
defaults.
Storage Level Descriptions (1-4) (9,A):
Enter the descriptions for storage levels 1 to 4. Warehouse
Master Maintenance (INV110) uses these values as defaults.
Confirm Putaway (1,0):
Specify whether Putaway Confirmation is required. Warehouse
Master Maintenance (INV110) uses these values as defaults.
Valid values are:
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
* '2' - Check Digit
15/08/17 Page
37
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Confirm Picking (1,0):
Specify whether Picking Confirmation is required. The Warehouse
Master Maintenance (INV110) uses these values as defaults.
Valid values are:
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
* '2' - Check Digit
Confirm Movements (1,0):
Specify whether Movement Confirmation is required. Warehouse
Master Maintenance (INV110) uses these values as defaults.
Valid values are:
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
* '2' - Check Digit
Confirm Replenishment (1,0):
Specify whether Replenishment Confirmation is required.
Warehouse Master Maintenance (INV110) uses these values as
defaults. Valid values are:
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
* '2' - Check Digit
Confirm Ship (1,0):
Specify whether Ship Confirmation is required. Warehouse Master
Maintenance (INV110) uses these values as defaults. Valid
values are:
15/08/17 Page
38
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
* '2' - Check Digit
Check Digit Algorithm (1,0):
Enter the program to be used as the Check Digit Algorithm. This
field is mandatory if any of the confirmation flags are set to
2. Warehouse Master Maintenance (INV110) uses these values as
defaults. The default program is WHM522.
Picking Type (1,0):
Specify the picking type. Valid values are:
* '0' - Main Storage
* '1' - Pick Face
* '2' - Two Tier
Unscheduled Receipts Last Number Used (7,0):
This field is used by Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance (WHM650)
in create mode to determine the Unscheduled Receipt number to
use.
Number of Days to Keep Receipt (5,0):
Clear Receipts (WHM920) uses this value as the default number
of days to keep Unscheduled Receipts.
Processing Options - WHM820D-01
F15=Installed Products
Displays the Installed Products Format panel (SYS821D-01). If
you have not pressed ENTER, any changes you have made on this
panel are NOT updated.
15/08/17 Page
39
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
40
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Management Parameters Panel - WHM820D-02
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM820D-02 BPCS System Generation PC2047S1
10/09/93 *
*SSAUSCH0 Warehouse Management Parameters SCHLAG
16:24:00 *
*
*
*
*
* Reserved Stock Location . . : SHIP
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel F15=Installed Products
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
15/08/17 Page
41
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
WAREHOUSE MASTER MAINTENANCE
This program lets you maintain warehouse codes and their
associated information. Warehouse codes are stored in the
Warehouse Master file (IWM).
* ACCESS: Menu INV
* Menu WHM01
15/08/17 Page
42
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
*
*
*INV110D1-01 System Software Associates, Inc. WSID
xx/xx/xx *
*CPU Warehouse Master Maintenance USER
HH:MM:SS*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
* 5=Display 6=Print 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Act Warehouse Description Status
*
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
* nn AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*
*
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F13=Filters
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS -- INV110D1-01
Action Code (2,0):
Enter the action code from the list displayed at the top of the
panel.
1=Create
(Available from maintenance programs) Enter <1> on the prompt
line, along with a new value in at least one key field, to
create records in the file. Then enter data on the maintenance
panels which follow. New records are printed on the audit
report. Note that you cannot enter 1 next to any displayed
15/08/17 Page
43
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
record. 1=Select on inquiry programs.
2=Revise
Enter <2> to change a record. You can either enter <2> and a
value for at least one key field on the prompt line or you can
enter <2> next to a displayed record. The change will be noted
on the audit report. Entering <2> next to an inactive record
will reactivate it.
3=Copy
Enter <3> to create a record which is based on an existing one.
You can either enter <3> and a value for at least one key field
on the prompt line or you can enter <3> next to a displayed
record. A maintenance panel displays, on which you can enter
the new key field and change any other data.
4=Delete
Enter <4> to delete a record. You can either enter <4> and the
key field(s) to be deleted on the prompt line or you can enter
<4> next to a displayed record you wish to delete. Deleted
records can be reactivated using Action Code 2 (Revise).
5=Display
Enter <5> to display a record without being able to change it.
You can either enter <5> and the key field(s) to be displayed
or you can enter <5> next to a record you wish to display.
6=Print
Enter <6> to print a record. You can either enter <6> and the
key field(s) to be printed on the prompt line or you can enter
<6> next to a displayed record. The record is printed on the
audit trail.
8=Position To
Enter <8> to move a record to the top of the page. You can
15/08/17 Page
44
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
either enter <8> and the key field(s) of the record on the
prompt line or you can enter <8> next to a displayed record.
The selected record is displayed at the top of the page. If
the record is not found, the next record in sequence is
displayed at the top of the page.
Once the Position To feature is used, you can continue to page
down or you can use the Position To action again with a
different value, but you cannot page up. However, you can
return to the top of the file by entering <8> with no record
selection on the prompt line.
Warehouse (2,A):
Enter the code of the warehouse to be maintained. This code is
user-defined. The warehouse and at least one valid location in
the warehouse must be set up before you can use the code for
other processing.
Description (30,A):
If you have selected F13 Filters option 3, Active Warehouses by
description, you may use the Description field with Action Code
8 to position the display.
With other filter options, this field displays the warehouse
description defined for existing warehouse records.
PROCESSING OPTIONS -- INV110D1-01
F1
for Help.
F3
to exit. BPCS returns to the calling program without
performing any processing on this panel.
15/08/17 Page
45
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F5
Refresh the panel. BPCS redisplays the panel beginning with the
first record.
F7
Scroll backward to display previous records (those
alphanumerically closer to A or those with earlier dates).
F8
Scroll forward to display additional records (those
alphanumerically closer to Z or 9, or those with later dates).
F13 = Filters
to display the filters window. This window allows you to
select from among the following sequences:
* 1. All records by warehouse
* 2. Active records by warehouse
* 3. Active records by description
Panel INV110D2-01 displays when you press <Enter> after
selecting the type of maintenance to perform on panel
INV110D1-01.
15/08/17 Page
46
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
*
*
*INV110D2-01 System Software Associates, Inc. WSID
xx/xx/xx *
*Mode Warehouse Master Maintenance USER
HH:MM:SS *
*
*
* Warehouse xx
*
*
*
* Description AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
*
* Address Line 1 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
*
* Address Line 2 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
*
* Address Line 3 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
*
* Country Code AAAA
*
* Postal Code AAAAAAAAA
*
* Phone Number AAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
*
*
*
* Allocatable Whse? A (Y/N) Last Receiver No
nnnnnn*
* Nettable MRP Whse? A (Y/N) Tolerance Delivery Days(+)
nnn *
* Output Queue AAAAAAAAAA Tolerance Delivery Days(-)
nnn *
* Default Company nn (G/L only) Tol Receipt Qty Percent(+)
nnn.n *
* Cost Material? A (Y/Blank) Tol Receipt Qty Percent(-)
nnn.n *
* Forecast Flag? A (Y/Blank) Automatic close(0=no,1=yes)
n *
* Facility AA Default Receiving Location
AAAAAA*
* Zone/Pick Sequence _ (Blank/0=Alpha Search, 1=Zone/Pick then Alpha
Search) *
* WHM Warehouse n (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS -- INV110D2-01
Description (30,A):
Enter a description (or the name) of the warehouse being
maintained. This is a required field.
(Warehouse) Address Line 1 (30,A):
Enter the address of the warehouse
15/08/17 Page
47
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Address Line 2 (30,A):
Enter the address of the warehouse.
Address Line 3 (30,A):
Enter the address of the warehouse.
Country Code (4,A):
This is a reference field. Create a 1-4 character code to
represent the warehouse country. BPCS does not edit your entry.
(Warehouse) Postal Code (9,A):
Enter the postal code for the warehouse.
(Warehouse) Phone Number (15,A):
Enter the phone number for the warehouse.
Allocatable Warehouse? (1,A):
This flag (Y/N) indicates whether or not inventory from this
warehouse may be allocated to satisfy orders (including
customer, resupply and shop orders). Orders and allocations
are not accepted against non-allocatable warehouses. You may,
however, issue from a non-allocatable warehouse.
Last Receiver Number (6,0):
Enter the last receiver number for this warehouse for a new
warehouse. After that it displays the last receiver number
used.
NOTE: The same receiver number is used for all receiver
tickets generated within a purchasing receiving session (PUR550)
Nettable MRP Warehouse? (1,A):
This flag (Y/N) indicates whether or not inventory at this
15/08/17 Page
48
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
warehouse is to be included in the on-hand balance for MRP
netting calculations, as well as MRP and DRP reports and
inquiries.
NOTE: Non-Nettable warehouse quantities do not appear in DRP
as well as MRP.
Tolerance Delivery Days (+) (3,0):
Enter the tolerance late (+) and early (-) for deliveries made
to this warehouse. These fields are used if there is no
delivery tolerance specified for the vendor.
Tolerance Delivery Days (-) (3,0):
Enter the tolerance late (+) and early (-) for deliveries made
to this warehouse. These fields are used if there is no
delivery tolerance specified for the vendor.
Output Queue (10,A):
Enter the identifier of the output queue which is to print pick
slips for this warehouse. (See ORD550, ORD560).
Default Company (2,0):
Enter the code of the company to which G/L posting from
Inventory is to be made. This field is edited if G/L is
installed; otherwise, it is optional.
Tol Receipt Qty Percent (+) (4,1):
Enter the tolerance for over (+) and under (-) receipt quantity
percent for this warehouse. The number you enter should be the
percent over or under you will accept, not the total percent,
i.e., +5% or -5%, not 95% or 105%.
If a commodity is being processed, BPCS first uses the Qty
Received % Tolerance Plus and Minus fields from the Commodity
Master maintained in Commodity Code Maintenance (PUR180). If no
value exists in these fields, BPCS uses the Tol Receipt Qty
15/08/17 Page
49
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Percent plus and minus fields defined here. If these values are
blank, BPCS uses the values found in the system parameters
program (PUR820).
For non-commodity processing, BPCS uses warehouse values. If
none exist, BPCS uses system parameter values.
Over tolerance cannot exceed 999.9. Under tolerance cannot
exceed 100.0
NOTE: If you do not want all warehouses to automatically close
purchase orders after partial receipt of product, you must set
the Automatic Close at the Purchasing System Parameters panel
(PUR820D-01) to "No" and the Tolerance Quantity Received to
zero. You can then set the Automatic Close and the Tolerance
Receipt Quantity Percent for individual warehouses in Warehouse
Master Maintenance (panel INV110D2-01).
BPCS uses your receiving tolerance parameters for Drop
Shipments based on the PUR820 purchasing parameter - "Close
Drop Shipment P.O. lines if Total Received Quantity is within
Tolerance."
NOTE: Tolerances will not be checked and warning messages will
not be displayed if PO Receipt is under/over PO Tolerance
percentage. Set up for Tolerance percentage can be found in
PUR820 (Parameters Generation).
Tol Receipt Qty Percent (-) (4,1):
Enter the tolerance for over (+) and under (-) receipt quantity
percent for this warehouse. The number you enter should be the
percent over or under you will accept, not the total percent,
i.e., +5% or -5%, not 95% or 105%.
If a commodity is being processed, BPCS first uses the Qty
Received % Tolerance Plus and Minus fields from the Commodity
Master maintained in Commodity Code Maintenance (PUR180). If
no value exists in these fields, BPCS uses the Tol Receipt Qty
Percent plus and minus fields in the warehouse master. If
these values are blank, BPCS uses the values found in the
15/08/17 Page
50
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
system parameters program (PUR820).
For non-commodity processing, BPCS uses warehouse values. If
none exist, BPCS uses system parameter values. Over tolerance
cannot exceed 999.9. Under tolerance cannot exceed 100.0
NOTE: If you do not want all warehouses to automatically close
purchase orders after partial receipt of product, you must set
the Automatic Close at the Purchasing System Parameters panel
(PUR820D-01) to "No" and the Tolerance Quantity Received to
zero. You can then set the Automatic Close and the Tolerance
Receipt Quantity Percent for individual warehouses in Warehouse
Master Maintenance (panel INV110D2-01).
BPCS uses your receiving tolerance parameters for Drop
Shipments based on the SYS800 purchasing parameter - "Close
Drop Shipment P.O. lines if Total Received Quantity is within
Tolerance.
NOTE: Tolerances will not be checked and warning messages will
not be displayed if PO Receipt is under/over PO Tolerance
percentage. Set up for Tolerance percentage can be found in
PUR820 (Parameters Generation).
BMR#3135
Cost Material? (1,A):
This flag (Y/blank) indicates whether or not inventory at this
warehouse should be costed. The value in this field is
included on the Warehouse Master Listing (INV115), but
otherwise is not currently implemented for any other function.
Reference only.
Forecast Flag (1,A):
This flag (Y/blank) indicates whether or not forecasts for
items in this warehouse are to be included in the gross
requirements for the "Load Forecasts to MPS/MRP" program
(FOR540). If this flag is "Y," the forecast flag in the
related item's Item Master file must also be "Y." If this flag
15/08/17 Page
51
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
is "Y," then the "Nettable MRP Warehouse?" flag above must also
be "Y."
Automatic Close (1,0):
Enter 1 if you wish to automatically close purchase order lines
may be automatically closed if the received quantity is within
the tolerances specified above. Enter 0 (default) to manually
close such P.O. lines.
NOTE: If you do not want all warehouses to automatically close
purchase orders after partial receipt of product, you must set
the Automatic Close at the Purchasing System Parameters panel
(PUR820D-01) to "No" and the Tolerance Quantity Received to
zero. You can then set the Automatic Close and the Tolerance
Receipt Quantity Percent for individual warehouses in Warehouse
Master Maintenance program, (panel INV110D2-01).
Facility (2,A):
(Required) This field identifies the facility in which this
warehouse is located. The facility code must already exist in
the Facility Master file (ZMF). Facilities may be entered or
maintained using SYS190 and may be listed using SYS195.
Default Receiving Location (6,A):
Enter the default receiving location for this warehouse; it
must be a valid location defined for this warehouse in Location
Master Maintenance (INV170). The default receiving location is
the default for all drop ship order lines. This location
specifies the profit center for drop ship inventory
transactions. This is also used as the default location for
component issue transactions for non-inventory (Type 6) items
in determining the profit center.
Zone/Pick Sequence (1,0):
Enter 0 or leave the field blank to initiate the
Allocation/Issue hierarchy in "Sequenced-Search" mode.
15/08/17 Page
52
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Enter 1 to choose the zone/pick sequence as an addition to the
Allocation/Issue hierarchy in "Sequenced-Search" mode.
WHM Warehouse (1,0):
Enter 0 if the warehouse is a non-managed warehouse. Enter 1
if the warehouse is a managed warehouse. If the warehouse is
non-managed, none of the subsequent panels are presented.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - INV110D2-01
F1
for Help.
F3
to exit. BPCS returns to the calling program without
performing any processing on this panel.
F5
Refresh the panel. BPCS redisplays the panel beginning with the
first record.
F12
to cancel. BPCS returns to the previous panel without
performing any processing on this panel.
For managed warehouses, continue with INV110D2-02.
15/08/17 Page
53
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV110D2-02 System Software Associates, Inc. WSID
xx/xx/xx *
* Mode Warehouse Master Maintenance USER
HH:MM:SS *
*
*
* Warehouse : AA xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
*
*
*
* Putaway after Post Ship Billing Update n (0=No,
1=Yes) *
* Stock Rotation Code n (0,1) Pick By Route n (0=No,
1=Yes) *
* Reservations n (0,1)
*
* Pick Qty Breakdown n (0,1) Default Ship Location AAAAAA
+ *
*
*
* Default Inventory Status n + xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
*
* Putaway Confirmation n (0=No, 1=Yes, 2=Check Digit)
*
* Movement Confirmation n (0=No, 1=Yes, 2=Check Digit)
*
* Replenishment Confirmation n (0=No, 1=Yes, 2=Check Digit)
*
* Pick Confirmation n (0=No, 1=Yes, 2=Check Digit)
*
* Ship Confirmation n (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Check Digit Algorithm AAAAAAAAAA
*
* Split Pack Picking n (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Paper System n (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Putaway Algorithm AAAAAAAAAA
*
* Default Receiving U/M n (0=Purchasing, 1=Stocking)
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Pop up windows are available for the following fields:
* Default Ship Location (WINILM)
* Default Inventory Status (WINIIS)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS -- INV110D2-02
Warehouse (2,A):
The warehouse that was selected for processing is displayed.
15/08/17 Page
54
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
The description defined for the selected warehouse displays.
NOTE: The following fields may be entered or updated only when
using Create or Revise mode.
Putaway after Post Ship Billing Update (1,0):
Enter 0 if Putaway is not to be invoked for returns into a
managed warehouse. Enter 1 if Putaway is to be initiated from
Post Ship Billing Update for returns into a managed warehouse.
It is recommended that this field is always set to 0.
Stock Rotation Code (1,0):
Select the Stock Rotation method required. This is used as a
default for this warehouse when defining Item/Warehouse records
in Item/Warehouse Maintenance (WHM150). Valid values are:
* '0' - First In First Out (FIFO)
* '1' - First Expiry First Out (FEFO) - lot controlled items
only
Pick by Route (1,0):
Specify whether picking by route is carried out. Valid values
are:
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
15/08/17 Page
55
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Reservations (1,0):
Enter 0 if Reservation processing does not apply to this
warehouse. Enter 1 if Reservation processing does apply to
this warehouse. If 1 is entered, then Batch Allocations
(ORD400) must be run before Pick/Select (WHM530). The system
'reserves' stock for the order, but does not create a hard
allocation. This is a form of 'soft allocation.'
Pick Qty Breakdown (1,0):
Specify whether Picking Quantity Breakdowns are required.
Valid values are :
* '0' - Detailed Quantities shown (Default)
* '1' - Only total number of units are shown
Default Ship Location (6,A):
(Press F4 for prompt). The Default Ship Location must be
entered. The location selected must exist and must be defined
as either a Loading Bay or Shipping Location.
If the location entered does not exist, then F10 is enabled.
This will present Warehouse/Location Maintenance (INV170) to
allow the creation of the shipping location.
Default Inventory Status (1,0):
(Press F4 for prompt). Mandatory. Enter the default Inventory
Status for stock received into this warehouse. The value
entered is in turn used as a default by Item/Warehouse
Maintenance (WHM150).
Picking Type (1,0):
This field is reserved for future use. Select the Picking Type
required. Valid values are:
* '0' - Picking takes place directly from Main Storage
15/08/17 Page
56
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
* '1' - Picking takes place from a picking location, which is
replenished directly from Main Storage
* '2' - Picking takes place from a picking location, which is
replenished from a Replenishment Location.
15/08/17 Page
57
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Putaway Confirmation (1,0)
Specify whether Putaway Confirmation is required. This field
defaults from System Parameters Generation (WHM820). Valid
values are:
* '0' - Putaway Confirmation is not required. (No)
* '1' - Putaway Confirmation is required. (Yes)
* '2' - Putaway Confirmation is required and should be
accompanied by Check Digit Entry. (Check Digit)
Movement Confirmation (1,0)
Specify whether Movement Confirmation is required. This field
defaults from System Parameters Generation (WHM820). Valid
values are :
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
* '2' - Movement Confirmation is required and should be
accompanied by Check Digit Entry. (Check Digit)
Replenishment Confirmation (1,0)
Specify whether Replenishment Confirmation is required. This
field defaults from System Parameters Generation (WHM820).
Valid values are :
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
* '2' - Replenishment Confirmation is required and should be
accompanied by Check Digit Entry. (Check Digit)
15/08/17 Page
58
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Picking Confirmation (1,0)
Specify whether Picking Confirmation is required. This field
defaults from System Parameters Generation (WHM820). Valid
values are :
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
* '2' - Pick Confirmation is required and should be accompanied
by Check Digit Entry. (Check Digit)
Ship Confirmation (1,0)
Specify whether Ship Confirmation is required. This field
defaults from System Parameters Generation (WHM820). Valid
values are :
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes
* '2' - Ship Confirmation is required and should be accompanied
by Check Digit Entry. (Check Digit)
Check Digit Algorithm (10,A)
The name of the Check Digit Algorithm to be used must be
entered if any of the Confirmation flags has been set to '2'
and a default algorithm has not been set up in the System
Parameters option. If a default has been set up in the System
Parameters it is possible to override it by entering another
value here. This field defaults from System Parameters
Generation (WHM820).
Split Pack Picking (1,0)
Specify whether Split Pack Picking is to be allowed. Valid
values are:
* '0' - No
15/08/17 Page
59
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
* '1' - Yes
15/08/17 Page
60
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Paper System (1,0)
This is a reference field only. Specify whether a paper system
of operation is to be used. Valid values are:
* '0' - No
* '1' - Yes (Default)
Putaway Algorithm (10,A)
(Mandatory) Specify the name of the Putaway Algorithm to be
used. The standard putaway algorithm is WHM511B.
Default Receiving U/M (1,0);
Enter 0 if the default Unit of Measure used by Booking-In
(WHM500) for the warehouse is the Purchasing Unit of Measure.
Enter 1 if the default Unit of Measure used by Booking-In
(WHM500) for the warehouse is the Stocking Unit of Measure.
PROCESSING OPTIONS -- INV110D2-02
F1
for Help.
F3
to exit. BPCS returns to the calling program without
performing any processing on this panel.
F4
to display pop-up window for the following fields:
* Default Ship Location (WINILM
* Default Inventory Status (WINIIS)
15/08/17 Page
61
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F10
is optionally enabled. It is available if the location you have
entered in Create or Revise mode has not yet been defined. This
function key presents Location Master Maintenance panel
INV170D2-02 so the new location may be created.
F12
to cancel. BPCS returns to the previous panel without
performing any processing on this panel.
15/08/17 Page
62
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
For managed warehouses, continue with INV110D2-03.
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV110D2-03 System Software Associates, Inc WSID
xx/xx/xx
* Mode Warehouse Master Maintenance USER
HH:MM:SS
*
* Warehouse xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
*
* Storage Level 1 AAAAAAAAA
* Storage Level 2 AAAAAAAAA
* Storage Level 3 AAAAAAAAA
* Storage Level 4 AAAAAAAAA
* Storage Level 5 AAAAAAAAA
* X,Y,Z
X,Y
* 'X' Location Element Description AAAAAAAAA Code Length n
n
* 'Y' Location Element Description AAAAAAAAA n
n
* 'Z' Location Element Description AAAAAAAAA n
*
*
* Allow Unscheduled Receipts n (0=No, 1=Yes)
* Default Invalid Item Location AAAAAA +
* One Step/Two Step Stock Counting n (1=One Step, 2=Two
Step)
* Stock Count Quantity Breakdown n (0=No, 1=Yes)
* Allow Rejected Inventory n (0=No, 1=Yes)
* Default Rejection Location AAAAAA +
*
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Pop up windows are available for the following fields:
* Default Invalid Item Location (WINILM)
* Default Rejection Location (WINILM)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS -- INV110D2-03
Storage Level 1 (9,A):
Mandatory. Enter the description for Storage Level 1. This
defaults from the value entered using System Parameters
Generation (WHM820).
15/08/17 Page
63
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Storage Level 2 (9,A):
Mandatory. Enter the description for Storage Level 2. This
defaults from the value entered using System Parameters
Generation (WHM820).
Storage Level 3 (9,A):
Mandatory. Enter the description for Storage Level 3. This
defaults from the value entered using System Parameters
Generation (WHM820).
15/08/17 Page
64
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Storage Level 4 (9,A):
Mandatory. Enter the description for Storage Level 4. This
defaults from the value entered using System Parameters
Generation (WHM820).
Storage Level 5 (9,A):
Mandatory. Enter the description for Storage Level 5. This
defaults from the value entered using System Parameters
Generation (WHM820).
'X' Location Element Description (9,A):
Mandatory. Enter the description for the 'X' (Aisle) Location
Element. This defaults from the value entered using System
Parameters Generation (WHM820).
'Y' Location Element Description (9,A):
Mandatory. Enter the description for the 'Y' (Bay) Location
Element. This defaults from the value entered using System
Parameters Generation (WHM820).
'Z' Location Element Description (9,A):
Mandatory. Enter the description for the 'Z' (Level) Location
Element. This defaults from the value entered using System
Parameters Generation (WHM820).
Code Length (X,Y,Z) (1,0):
Enter the default Code Lengths for Aisle (X), Bay (Y) and Level
(Z). These must be greater than 0 and must together total 6.
These fields default from the values entered using System
Parameters Generation (WHM820).
Code Length (X,Y) (1,0):
Enter the default Code Lengths for Aisle (X) and Bay (Y).
These must be greater than 0 and must together total 6. These
15/08/17 Page
65
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
fields default from the values entered using System Parameters
Generation (WHM820).
Allow Unscheduled Receipts (1,0):
Enter 0 if Unscheduled Receipts may not be created for this
warehouse using Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance. Enter 1 if
Unscheduled Receipts may be created for this warehouse.
15/08/17 Page
66
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Default Invalid Item Location (6,A):
(Press F4 for prompt). This field must be left blank if Allow
Unscheduled Receipts = 0. If Allow Unscheduled Receipts = 1,
then the default Invalid Item location must be entered. If the
location entered does not exist, then F10 is enabled. This
will present Location Master Maintenance (INV170) to allow the
creation of the Invalid Item Location. If the location entered
already exists, then it must be defined as an Invalid Item
location. The Invalid Item location is used to store goods
that are received into the warehouse as Unscheduled Receipts,
for which a valid Item Master record has not been previously
created.
One Step/Two Step Stock Counting (1,0):
Enter 1 if One Step Stock Counting is to apply for this
warehouse. This means that when counts are posted using Stock
Count Post (WHM640), then the stock level for that item is
automatically adjusted. If Two Step Stock Counting applies,
then the Stock Counts are recorded but adjustments are not made
automatically. Inventory Transaction Post (WHM610) should not
be used to make necessary adjustments.
Stock Count Quantity Breakdown (1,0):
Specify whether Stock Quantity Breakdown is required. If 0 is
entered, then total unit quantities are entered using Stock
Count Post (WHM640). If 1 is entered then detailed quantities
may be entered, e.g., number of inners, outers, etc. It is
recommended that this flag is always set to 1.
15/08/17 Page
67
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Allow Rejected Inventory (1,0):
Enter 0 if Rejected Inventory from Purchase Orders is not held
as stock on the system. Enter 1 if Rejected Inventory is moved
to the default Rejection Location when it is received.
Default Rejection Location (6,A):
(Press F4 for prompt). This field must be left blank if Allow
Rejected Inventory = 0. If Allow Rejected Inventory = 1, then
the default Rejection location must be entered. If the
location entered does not exist, then F10 is enabled. This
will present Location Master Maintenance (INV170) to allow the
creation of the Rejection Location. If the location entered
already exists, then it must be defined as a Rejection
location. The Rejection location is used to store goods that
are rejected by Goods Receiving (WHM510).
15/08/17 Page
68
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS -- INV110D2-03
F1
for Help.
F3
to exit. BPCS returns to the calling program without
performing any processing on this panel.
F4
to display pop-up window for the following fields:
* Default Invalid Item Location (WINILM)
* Default Rejection Location (WINILM)
F10
is optionally enabled. It is available if the location you have
entered in Create or Revise mode has not yet been defined. This
function key presents Location Master Maintenance panel
INV170D2-02 so the new location may be created.
F12
to cancel. BPCS returns to the previous panel without
performing any processing on this panel.
For managed warehouses, continue with INV110D2-04.
15/08/17 Page
69
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV110D2-04 System Software Associates, Inc. WSID
xx/xx/xx *
* Mode Warehouse Master Maintenance USER
HH:MM:SS *
*
*
* Warehouse xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
*
*
*
* Pallet Label Type n (0=Standard,
1=Alternative) *
* Allow Multi-Level Picking n (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Full Pallet Picking n (0=Storage, 1=Picking)
*
* Produce One Pick List Per Zone n (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Physical Inventory Quantity Breakdown n (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
*
*
* Move Pick to Shipping or via Consolidation n (0=Shipping,
1=Consolidation) *
* Shipping Algorithm AAAAAAAAAA
*
* Picking Algorithm AAAAAAAAAA
*
*
*
* Pick by Units n (0=No, 1=Yes) Unit Capacity
nnnnnnnnn.nn *
* Pick by Volume n (0=No, 1=Yes) Volume Capacity
nnnnnnnnn.nn *
* Pick by Weight n (0=No, 1=Yes) Weight Capacity
nnnnnnnnn.nn *
*
*
* Zones AAA (*=All) AAA AAA AAA AAA
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS -- INV110D2-04
Pallet Label Type (1,0):
Enter 0 if the Standard Pallet Label is to be used within this
warehouse. Enter 1 if the Alternate Pallet Label is to be used
in this warehouse.
Allow Multi-Level Picking (1,0):
Enter 0 if only one Picking location may be specified for each
item within this warehouse. Enter 1 if up to 5 Picking
locations may be specified for this warehouse. It is
recommended that this field is always set to 1.
15/08/17 Page
70
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Full Pallet Picking (1,0):
Enter 1 if full pallets are to be picked from main storage
locations. Enter 1 if full pallets are to be picked from the
highest level Picking location for the item. This field is
used as a default by Item/Warehouse Maintenance (WHM150).
Produce One Pick List Per Zone (1,0):
Enter 0 if all items selected for picking at the same time are
printed on the same pick list. Enter 1 if a separate pick list
is to be created for each Zone contained within the selection.
This field is used by Pick Select/Print (WHM530). This field
must be set to 1 if any of Pick by Units, Pick by Weight or
Pick by Quantity is set to 1.
Physical Inventory Quantity Breakdown (1,0):
Specify whether Physical Inventory Quantity Breakdown is
required. If 0 is entered, then total unit quantities are
entered using Tag Entry/Update (INV600). If 1 is entered then
detailed quantities may be entered, e.g., number of inners,
outers, etc.
15/08/17 Page
71
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Move Pick to Ship or Via Consolidation (1,0):
Enter 0 if picked stock is to be moved directly to Shipping.
Enter 1 if the picked stock is moved to a Consolidation area
prior to Shipping. This field is reserved for future use.
Ship Algorithm (10,A):
This field is currently not used.
Picking Algorithm (10,A):
This field is currently not used.
Pick by Units (1,0):
Enter 0 is Volumetric Picking is not to apply by units for this
warehouse. Enter 1 if Volumetric Picking is to apply by units
for this warehouse.
Unit Capacity (11,2):
This field must be set to 0 if Pick by Units = 0. If Pick by
Units = 1, then a quantity greater than 0 must be entered. The
Unit Capacity is the threshhold at which Pick List Print
(WHM530) increments the Pick List Suffix and produces a
separate pick list.
Pick by Volume (1,0):
Enter 0 if Volumetric Picking is not to apply by volume for
this warehouse. Enter 1 if Volumetric Picking is to apply by
volume for this warehouse.
15/08/17 Page
72
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Volume Capacity (11,2):
This field must be set to 0 if Pick by Volume = 0. If Pick by
Volume = 1, then a quantity greater than 0 must be entered.
The Volume Capacity is the threshold at which Pick List Print
(WHM530) increments the Pick List Suffix and produces a
separate pick list.
Pick by Weight (1,0):
Enter 0 if Volumetric Picking is not to apply by weight for
this warehouse. Enter 1 if Volumetric Picking is to apply by
weight for this warehouse.
Weight Capacity (11,2):
This field must be set to 0 if Pick by Weight = 0. If Pick by
Weight = 1, then a quantity greater than 0 must be entered.
The Weight Capacity is the threshhold at which Pick List Print
(WHM530) increments the Pick List Suffix and produces a
separate pick list.
Zones (3,A):
(Five fields). Enter the zones for which Volumetric Picking
applies. If an asterisk is entered in the first Zone field,
then Volumetric Picking applies to all zones within the
warehouse.
PROCESSING OPTIONS -- INV110D2-04
F1
for Help.
F3
to exit. BPCS returns to the calling program without
performing any processing on this panel.
15/08/17 Page
73
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F12
to cancel. BPCS returns to the previous panel without
performing any processing on this panel.
15/08/17 Page
74
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Master List
The Warehouse Master List (INV115) allows you to request a
printed list of warehouses within Warehouse Management.
ACCESS: Warehouse Management Maintenance menu (WHM01),
option 21.
15/08/17 Page
75
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV115-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Warehouse Master Listing USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Facility To 99
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*Run Time Parameter n (0=Interactive 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Warehouse Master List Panel
Lower/Upper Facility Code (2,A):
Required. If you run the report using the default values, BPCS
prints the Warehouse Master List for all facilities. If you
want to print only some of the facilities, enter range of
facilities.
NOTE: Your entries do not have to be valid facility codes.
Processing Options - Warehouse Master List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
15/08/17 Page
76
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
77
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Geography Maintenance
The Warehouse Geography Maintenance (WHM100) program allows
maintenance of the Warehouse Geography Master file. This
defines the limits for locations created using Group Location
Maintenance (WHM120). Locations may not be maintained as a
group unless an active Warehouse Geography record exists.The
length of each section of the location code was previously
defined using Warehouse Master Maintenance (INV110). Location
code elements are compared on a character-by-character basis.
Thus, From: 09 To: 10 is invalid, since '9' is greater than
'0.' The correct limits in this example would be From: 09 To:
19.
Warehouse Geography Maintenance Panel - WHM100-01
At this panel, you can create, revise, copy, delete, display,
print or position to warehouse geographies that you want to
maintain on WHM100-02. You can select a warehouse in one of two
ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
78
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM100-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Warehouse Geography Maintenance USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
* 5=Display 6=Print 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Warehouse Record
*
* Act Code Description Status
*
* __ __
*
* ED EAST DIST.-D2 FACILITY Active
*
* WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY Active
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Bottom
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F13=Filters
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Warehouse Geography Maintenance Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Warehouse (2,A):
Key the warehouse code for the warehouse geography record. This
must correspond to an active managed warehouse.
15/08/17 Page
79
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
The description associated with each warehouse is displayed.
Record Status (8,A):
An inactive status is used to show a logically deleted
warehouse from the Warehouse Management System.
Available Actions - Warehouse Geography Maintenance Panel
1=Create
2=Revise
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print
8=Position To
Processing Options - Warehouse Geography Maintenance Panel
F13=Filter
Displays the Active Warehouses Filter Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
80
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Geography Maintenance Panel - WHM100-02
This panel displays the allowable range for the X, Y, Z
locations and the allowable range for the X, Y locations. You
can maintain any of these fields by typing over the displayed
values.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM100-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Warehouse Geography Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse . : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
*
*
* Enter the allowable range for X,Y,Z Locations :
*
*
*
* x-desc . . AA__ To ZZ__ ( 2
chars) *
* y-desc . . 00__ To 99__ ( 2
chars) *
* z-desc . . 00__ To 99__ ( 2
chars) *
*
*
* Enter the allowable range for X,Y Locations :
*
*
*
* x-desc . . AA__ To ZZ__ ( 2
chars) *
* y-desc . . 0000 To 9999 ( 4
chars) *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Warehouse Geography Maintenance Panel
Mode (10,A):
The mode of operation is displayed, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM100-01.
15/08/17 Page
81
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Code (2,A):
The Warehouse Code displays as it was entered on panel
WHM100-01.
Description (30,A):
The Description of the selected warehouse is displayed.
From/To Aisle (4,A):
Enter the From and To codes required for the Aisle within X,Y,Z
locations. The Aisle From code may not be greater than the
Aisle To and must be the length defined using Warehouse Master
Maintenance (INV100).
From/To Bay (4,A):
Enter the From and To codes required for the Bay within X,Y,Z
locations. The Bay From code may not be greater than the Bay To
and must be the length defined using Warehouse Master
Maintenance (INV100).
From/To Level (4,A):
Enter the From and To codes required for the Level within X,Y,Z
locations. The Level From code may not be greater than the
Level To and must be the length defined using Warehouse Master
Maintenance (INV100).
From/To Aisle (4,A):
Enter the From and To codes required for the Aisle within X,Y
locations. The Aisle From code may not be greater than the
Aisle To and must be the length defined using Warehouse Master
Maintenance (INV100).
From/To Bay (4,A):
Enter the From and To codes required for the Bay within X,Y
locations. The Bay From code may not be greater than the Bay To
15/08/17 Page
82
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
and must be the length defined using Warehouse Master
Maintenance (INV100).
Processing Options - Warehouse Geography Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
83
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Geography List
The Warehouse Geography List (WHM105) provides a printed list
of the current way in which each warehouse, within a selected
range, is organized in terms of locations.
This panel lists the Warehouse Geography file.
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM105-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Warehouse Geography List USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter
*
*
*
* Warehouse Code . . . . . 001 To 999 +
*
*
*
*
*
* Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Warehouse Geography List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
From/To Warehouse (WINIWM)
15/08/17 Page
84
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Warehouse Geography List Panel
From/To Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the Warehouse
Codes for the From and To lists.
Record Status (1,0):
Enter 0 for all records or a 1 for only active records.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
Processing Options - Warehouse Geography List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
85
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Group Location Maintenance
The Group Location Maintenance (WHM120) program allows the
maintenance of a range of locations within a warehouse. The
limits of the range were previously defined using Warehouse
Geography (WHM100). The program also has the facility to handle
exceptions. Please note that the descriptions for Aisle, Bay
and Level are user-defined and may be maintained using
Warehouse Master Maintenance (INV110).
Group Location Maintenance Panel - WHM120-01
This panel allows you to select a warehouse for which to
maintain group locations. You can select a warehouse in one of
two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
86
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM120-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Group Location Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*Select action and press Enter. 1=Select 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Act Warehouse Description
*
*
*
* ED EAST DIST.-D2 FACILITY
*
* WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Bottom
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Group Location Maintenance Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Warehouse (2,A):
Valid warehouse codes are displayed if they have been entered
into the Warehouse Management System.
Description (30,A):
The description associated with each warehouse is displayed.
15/08/17 Page
87
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Available Actions - Group Location Maintenance Panel
1=Select
8=Position To
Available Function Keys - Group Location Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
88
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Group Location Maintenance Panel - WHM120-02
This panel allows you to choose a range of locations for
maintenance.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM120-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Group Location Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* For X.Y type locations leave Level Fields Blank
*
* For Free Format locations use Location Maintenance program (INV170).
*
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . WD WEST DIST.CTR_D1 FACILITY
*
*
*
* From Aisle . . . . . . . . . MS__ + To Aisle . . MS__ +
*
*
*
* From Bay . . . . . . . . . . 00__ + To Bay . . . 05__ +
*
*
*
* From Level . . . . . . . . . 00__ + To Level . . 05__ +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Create F10=Revise F12=Cancel F24=More
Keys *
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Group Location Maintenance Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
From/To Location (Element 1) (WINILM)
From/To Location (Element 2) (WINILM)
From/To Location (Element 3) (WINILM)
15/08/17 Page
89
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Group Location Maintenance Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
Displays the warehouse selected from panel WHM120-01.
From/To Location Element 1 (Lane) (4,A)
(Press F4 to access the pop-up windows.) Enter the first
element of the location required as the From and To values.
From one to four characters may be entered, depending upon how
location codes are constructed (as dictated by the warehouse
geography record for this warehouse).
From/To Location Element 2 (Bay) (4,A)
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the second
element of the location required as the From and To values.
From one to four characters may be entered, depending upon how
location codes are constructed (as dictated by the warehouse
geography record for this warehouse).
From/To Location Element 3 (Level) (4,A)
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the third element
of the location required as the From and To values. From one to
four characters may be entered, depending upon how location
codes are constructed (as dictated by the warehouse geography
record for this warehouse).
The three location elements are concatenated together to form
the location code, and all three may possibly be of different
lengths. Each element can be a maximum of four characters long,
but all three elements together cannot be longer than six
characters.
Example: Element 1 could be 1 long, element 2 could be 3 long,
and element 3 could be 2 long. Thus:
Element 1: "A"
15/08/17 Page
90
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Element 2: "BCD"
Element 3: "EF"
Give a location code of "ABCDEF"
NOTE: The elements are compared character by character, so if
the first element is one position, a range of A1 to Z9 would
NOT include BA because the second character is not in the 1-9
range.
Processing Options - Group Location Maintenance Panel
F21=Delete
BPCS attempts to de-activate all the locations in the range
specified.
F22=Re-activate
BPCS attempts to re-activate all the locations in the range
specified.
F24=More Keys
Displays more Function Keys available on this panel.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
91
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Group Location Maintenance Panel - WHM120-03
This panel allows you to maintain a range of locations.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM120-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/19/93 *
* Create Group Location Maintenance SCHLAG
13:55:39 *
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . . . : WD From Location MM0000 To MM0505
*
*
*
* Description . . . . . . . . WD Main Storage - Buld
*
* Profit Center . . . . . . . 001 + Used for G/L only
*
* Zone . . . . . . . . . . .
*
* Usage . . . . . . . . . . . 0 + Main Storage
*
* Pick Sequence . . . . . . . 50
*
* Volume Capacity . . . . . .
*
* Weight Capacity . . . . . .
*
* Location Capacity . . . . . 2.00 pallets
*
*
*
* Allocatable? . . . . . . . Y (Y=Yes, N=No)
*
* Storage Type . . . . . . . 0 + Racking
*
* Stack Height . . . . . . . 1
*
* Pallet Types . . . . . . . * + + + + + + + + + +
*
* Location Category . . . . .
*
* Off-Site Location? . . . . 0 (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Location Naming . . . . . : 1 (0=X.Y, 1=X.Y.Z)
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Group Location Maintenance Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Profit Center (WINRCL)
Usage (WINILT)
Storage Type (WINIST)
Pallet Types (WINICT)
15/08/17 Page
92
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Group Location Maintenance Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
Displays the warehouse selected on the first panel (WHM120-01).
From/To Location (6,A)
Displays the locations entered on the second panel (WHM120-02)
as the From/To range value in concatenated form.
Description (30,A):
Enter a 30 character description to be used to describe all the
locations in the range selected. If the program is in create
mode, then this field will be placed on all the locations in
the range. If the program is in Revise mode, then only if this
field is changed will it be updated on all the locations in the
range specified.
Profit Center (12,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the profit center
to be used against the General Ledger for all the locations in
the range selected. If the program is in create mode, then this
field will be placed on all the locations in the range. If the
program is in Revise mode, then only if this field is changed
will it be updated on all the locations in the range specified.
Location Zone (3,A):
Enter the logical zone within the warehouse that all the
locations in the range selected reside in. This may be left
blank. If the program is in create mode, then this field will
be placed on all the locations in the range. If the program is
in Revise mode, then only if this field is changed will it be
updated on all the locations in the range specified.
Type (1,A):
Enter the location type code that matches all the locations
15/08/17 Page
93
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
within the range selected. The type must be in the range "A" to
"9". If the program is in create mode, then this field will be
placed on all the locations in the range. If the program is in
Revise mode, then only if this field is changed will it be
updated on all the locations in the range specified. This must
be one of the following:
* A - Rejection
* 0 - Main Storage
* 1 - Picking
* 2 - Replenishment
* 3 - Split Pack Location (not currently supported)
* 4 - Manufacturing (not currently supported)
* 5 - Inspection
* 6 - Ship
* 7 - Receiving
* 8 - Loading Bay (not currently used)
* 9 - Consolidation Area (not currently used)
Pick Sequence (5,0):
Enter the picking sequence number of all the locations in the
range specified. This describes the sequence in which to
perform picking. Picking is by Zone, Pick Sequence, Location.
If the program is in create mode, then this field will be
placed on all the locations in the range. If the program is in
Revise mode, then only if this field is changed will it be
updated on all the locations in the range specified.
Volume Capacity (11,2):
Enter the maximum volume that each location in the range
specified occupies. The unit of measure is the standard unit of
measure used by the company, e.g., cubic meters. If the program
is in create mode, then this field will be placed on all the
locations in the range. If the program is in Revise mode, then
only if this field is changed will it be updated on all the
locations in the range specified. Reference only. Optional.
15/08/17 Page
94
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Weight Capacity (11,2):
Enter the maximum weight of stock that can be accommodated in
each of the locations in the range specified. This is
particularly important if racked storage is used, as it would
not be desirable to attept to store very heavy items high up.
The unit of measure is the standard unit of measure used by the
company. e.g., Kilograms. If the program is in create mode,
then this field will be placed on all the locations in the
range. If the program is in Revise mode, then only if this
field is changed will it be updated on all the locations in the
range specified. Reference only. Optional.
Location Capacity (11,2):
Enter the maximum of standard pallets that can be contained
within each single location in the range specified. Mandatory
for Main Storage and Inspection locations. Not required
otherwise. If the program is in create mode, then this field
will be placed on all the locations in the range. If the
program is in Revise mode, then only if this field is changed
will it be updated on all the locations in the range specified.
Allocatable? (1,A):
Enter "Y"=Yes if stock can be allocated from all the locations
within the range specified. This can only be "N"=No if stock
cannot be allocated from these locations or if the entire
warehouse does not allow stock to be allocated from within it.
This only affects automatic allocation. If the program is in
create mode, then this field will be placed on all the
locations in the range. If the program is in Revise mode, then
only if this field is changed will it be updated on all the
locations in the range specified.
Storage Type (1,A):
Enter the storage type code that applies to all the locations
in the range specified. The storage type can only be in the "0"
to "6" range.
15/08/17 Page
95
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
* 0 - Racking
* 1 - Bulk Storage
* 2 - Drive in LIFO
* 3 - Drive in FIFO
* 4 - Live Racking
* 5 - High Rise Racking
* 6 - Free Standing Location
These codes are reference only. If the program is in create
mode, then this field will be placed on all the locations in
the range. If the program is in Revise mode, then only if this
field is changed will it be updated on all the locations in the
range specified.
Stack Height (3,0):
Enter the maximum number of standard pallets that can be
stacked on top of each other in each of the locations in the
range specified. If the program is in create mode, then this
field will be placed on all the locations in the range. If the
program is in Revise mode, then only if this field is changed
will it be updated on all the locations in the range specified.
Pallet Types (1,A):
Enter up to ten different pallet types that can be placed
within each of the locations in the range specified. If there
are no pallet type restrictions, place an asterisk in the first
position. If the program is in create mode, then this field
will be placed on all the locations in the range. If the
program is in Revise mode, then only if this field is changed
will it be updated on all the locations in the range specified.
Location Category (1,A):
Enter the location category code that applies to all the
locations in the range specified. This is used in Putaway to
help dictate which locations an item should be put in. e.g.,
Frozen foods might have a location category of "F." Then all
15/08/17 Page
96
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
the locations that are within a warehouse's "Cold Room" might
also have an "F" location category. Optional.
If the program is in create mode, then this field will be
placed on all the locations in the range. If the program is in
Revise mode, then only if this field is changed will it be
updated on all the locations in the range specified.
Off Site Location? (1,A):
Enter "Y"=Yes if these locations are "Off Site," otherwise
enter an "N"=No. Reference only. If the program is in create
mode, then this field will be placed on all the locations in
the range. If the program is in Revise mode, then only if this
field is changed will it be updated on all the locations in the
range specified.
Location Naming (1,A):
This describes the naming convention used for all the locations
within the range specified. The value will be in the "0" to "2"
range.
* "0" = X.Y = Two part location names. The Location Element 3
(Level) is not used.
* "1" = X.Y.Z = Three part location names. All three Location
elements (Aisle, Bay & Level) are used.
* "2" = Free = Free format location names.
PROCESSING OPTIONS Group Location Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
97
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Group Location Maintenance Panel - WHM120-04
This panel allows you to exclude from the create/revise
process. Note that it lists locations that will be
created/revised. Locations are not created/ revised until you
press Enter. You can select records in one of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
98
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM120-04 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 WSID
10/19/93 *
* Revise Group Location Maintenance SCHLAG
HH:MM:SS *
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 2=Revise 4=Exclude 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Act Location Description Status
*
*
*
* MM0000 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0001 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0002 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0003 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0004 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0005 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0100 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0101 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0102 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0103 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0104 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0105 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0200 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
* MM0201 WD Main Storage - Bulk Active
*
*
More... *
* Enter=Accept F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Group Location Maintenance Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Location (6,A):
Displays Valid Location codes if they have been entered into
the Warehouse Management System, and the program is NOT is
Create Mode. If the program is in Create Mode, then all the
locations that fall between the entered range criteria will be
displayed.
15/08/17 Page
99
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
The description associated with each existing location code
will be displayed.
Available Actions - Group Location Maintenance Panel
Standard:
2=Revise
8=Position To
Additional:
4=Exclude
Prevents the location from either being updated or created.
Locations are not created/updated until Enter is pressed from
this panel.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Group Location Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
100
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
LOCATION MASTER MAINTENANCE
This program allows you to maintain "locations," which are
specific locations or subdivisions within a warehouse. Items
are assigned to locations within warehouses. Location codes
are stored in the Location Master file (ILM).
NOTE: The BPCS Inventory product requires that at least one
location be defined in the system.
Warehouse Management Maintenance Menu (SSAWH1)
15/08/17 Page
101
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
*
*
*INV170D1-01 System Software Associates, Inc. WSID
xx/xx/xx*
*Mode Warehouse Location Selection USER
HH:MM:SS*
*
*
*Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
*5=Display 6=Print 8=Position To
*
*
*
*Act Warehouse Location Description Status
*
*nn AA AAAAAA
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*nn xx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
*
*
*
*
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F13=Filters
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS -- INV170D1-01
Warehouse (2,A):
Enter the code of the warehouse for which this location is
being maintained. This location is valid only within this
warehouse, unless you set it up under another warehouse code.
Before using a warehouse code, the warehouse must be defined on
the Warehouse Master file using the Warehouse Master
Maintenance program (INV110).
15/08/17 Page
102
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Location (6,A):
Enter the location code to be added/updated. Locations are the
lowest level for which inventory can be stocked.
If this field is left blank, a normal search routine will take
place. Enter a Zero to force the location and have no other
locations considered. Enter a 1 for a default location, which
will consider no other location in the current warehouse. This
field has no effect on a location defined within a managed
warehouse.
*Blank is not a valid location. The JIT product uses this
series of characters to update the blank location as the
location override in the IWI file.
After you select the type of maintenance to perform on panel
INV170D1-01, BPCS displays panel INV170D2-01.
15/08/17 Page
103
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
*
*
*INV170D2-01 System Software Associates, Inc. WSID
xx/xx/xx*
*Mode Warehouse-Location Maintenance USER
HH:MM:SS*
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse Location xx xxxxxx
*
*
*
*
*
* Loc Description AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
*
* Profit Center AAAAAAAAAAAA Used for G/L only
*
* Zone AAA
*
* Pick Sequence nnnnn
*
* Type A P/Blank
*
* Volume Capacity nnnnnnnnn.nn
*
* Weight Capacity nnnnnnnnn.nn
*
* Location Capacity ????????
*
* Unit/Meas aa
*
* Allocatable? A (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Storage Type ??????
*
* Stack Height ???????
*
* Location Usage A Blank 0=Forced
1=Default *
* Pallet Types ??????
*
* Location Category ??????
*
* Off-Site Location A (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Location Naming A 0=X.Y, 1=X.Y.Z, 2=Free
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Locations are the lowest of the four inventory levels. In
BPCS, a location is a "logical location," meaning that it can
be viewed as a stocking point for item inventory. Locations
are ALWAYS within a warehouse. Each warehouse can have its own
system for locations.
EXAMPLE:
Warehouse: NY (New York Warehouse)
Locations: A1B2R3 (aisle=A1, bin=B2, row=R3)
Warehouse: LA
15/08/17 Page
104
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Locations: *none* (no locations within LA
warehouse)
Warehouse: CH
Locations: PICK (Chicago "pick" location)
Warehouse: CH
Locations: INTRAN (Chicago "in transit" location)
You may have many other location code assignments based upon
the specific needs of your business. Locations generally refer
to the most specific reporting level for stock by warehouse.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS -- INV170D2-01
Location Description (30,A):
Enter a description of the location being maintained.
Profit Center (12,A):
(Required field if inventory transactions are posted to the
General Ledger.) Enter the profit center code to which
transactions involving this warehouse-location are posted.
Zone (3,A):
(Optional) Enter the code of the zone in which this location
is found. This value is used for order picking sequence and
limits.
Pick Sequence (5,0):
Enter the pick sequence number for this location.
This sequence number is used if you specify batch pulling
during Pick Slip Printing (ORD560).
Type (Location) (1,A):
Enter a "P" in this field to identify that this is a "pick"
15/08/17 Page
105
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
location. BPCS uses this entry as a filter for the Warehouse
Inquiry (INV330) to show only pickable (or primary) locations.
Otherwise, leave this field blank to indicate it is not a
"pick" location.
Volume Capacity (11,2):
Enter the volume capacity amount, if it exists for this
location. Reference only.
Weight Capacity (11,2):
Enter the weight capacity amount, if it exists for this
location. Reference only.
Maximum No. Pallets (11,2):
Enter the number of pallets which can be stored in this
location. BPCS uses this value to calculate "Available"
pallets for the Warehouse Inquiry (INV330). For locations
within managed warehouses, this field displays as "Location
Capacity."
Unit of Measure (2,A):
Key the stocking unit of measure for items in this warehouse
location. This field is displayed for non-managed warehouse
locations only.
Allocatable? (1,A):
Enter a "1" if you want to allow automatic allocations from
this location. Otherwise, enter "0." Manual allocations may
always be done from any location in an allocatable warehouse.
NOTE: If you selected option "S" (single issue from staging
location) in the "Multiple Issue from Lot/Location Allocation"
field of MRP and Shop Floor System Parameters (MRP821D-01),
this location AND ALL OTHER LOCATIONS IN THIS WAREHOUSE must be
non-allocatable. Issues from non-allocatable locations do not
create hard allocation (ELA) records nor affect the allocated
15/08/17 Page
106
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
quantity in the Location Inventory (ILI) file.
Storage Type (1,0):
Enter 0 for no offsite location. Enter 1 for an offsite
location.
Stack Height (3,0):
Enter 0 for no offsite location. Enter 1 for an offsite
location.
Pallet Types (1,A):
Enter 0 for no offsite location. Enter 1 for an offsite
location.
Location Category (1,A):
Enter 0 for no offsite location. Enter 1 for an offsite
location.
Offsite Location (1,A):
Enter 0 for no offsite location. Enter 1 for an offsite
location.
Location Naming (1,A):
Leave the field blank or enter 0 for forced location choices.
Enter 1 to default to allow BPCS to choose locations. This
field has no effect on a location defined within a managed
warehouse.
Location Usage (1,0):
Leave the field blank or enter 0 for forced location choices.
Enter 1 to default to allow BPCS to choose locations. This
field has no effect on a location defined within a managed
warehouse
15/08/17 Page
107
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
15/08/17 Page
108
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
supportedsupported
Allows the use of an interim location when confirming a pick or
a putaway to or from that off-site location. The interim
location must be a shipping or receiving location.Location
Master List
The Location Master List allows you to request a printed list
of Locations within Warehouse Managment.
ACCESS: Warehouse Management Maintenance Menu (WHM01),
option 25.
15/08/17 Page
109
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV175D-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Location Master Listing USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse To 99
*
*
*
* Location To 999999
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter n (0=Interactive 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Location Master Listing Panel
Lower/Upper Warehouse Number (2,A):
Enter the lower and upper warehouse to designate the range for
which to print this report. Extreme values by default.
Lower/Upper Location (6,A):
Enter the lower and upper location to designate the range for
which to print this report. Extreme values by default.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Location Master Listing Panel
15/08/17 Page
110
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F18=Interactive
Runs the report interactively rather than in batch.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
111
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Pallet Types Master Maintenance
The Pallet Types Maintenance (WHM110) selection allows
maintenance of the Pallet Types Master file. These types can
then be attached to items to help identify which items can be
placed in which locations in the warehouse. The maintenance
program consists of two panels.
15/08/17 Page
112
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Pallet Type Master Maintenance Panel - WHM110-01
This panel allows you to create, revise, copy, delete, display,
print or position to a Pallet Type to maintain. You can select
Pallet Types in one of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
113
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM110-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Pallet Type Master Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
* 5=Display 6=Print 8=Position To
*
*
*
*
*
* Act Type Description Record
*
*
*
* A Alternate Pallet 40 x 36 2-W Active
*
* D Disposable Fiberboard Pallet Active
*
* S Standard 48 x 40 4-Way Pallet Active
*
* 0 Standard Container Active
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* More...
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F13=Filters
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Pallet Type Master Maintenance Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Pallet Type (1,A):
Enter the pallet type for the record to be maintained.
15/08/17 Page
114
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
BPCS displays the description associated with each Pallet Type.
Record Status (8,A):
BPCS uses an Inactive status to show a logically deleted Pallet
Type from the Warehouse Management System.
Available Actions - Pallet Type Master Maintenance Panel
1=Create
2=Revise
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print
8=Position To
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Pallet Type Master Maintenance Panel
F13=Filters
Displays the Pallet Type Filter Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
115
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Pallet Type Master Maintenance Panel - WHM110-02
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM110-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Pallet Type Master Maintenance USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
*
*
* Pallet Type. . . . . . . . : S
*
* Description . . . . . . . . . . Standard 48 x 40 4-Way Pallet
*
*
*
* Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . 48.00
*
* Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48.00
*
* Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.00
*
* Optimize Storage On . . . . . . 1 (0=Length 1=Width
2=Height) *
* Storage Factor. . . . . . . . . 1.00
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Pallet Type Master Maintenance Panel
Mode (10,A):
Displays the mode of operation, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM110-01.
Pallet Type (1,A):
The Pallet Type is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM110-01.
15/08/17 Page
116
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
Enter a 30 character description to be used to describe this
Pallet Type.
Length (7,2):
Reference Only. Optional. Enter the length of the pallet in
your standard units of measure. Example: Centimeters,
Millimeters or Meters.
Width (7,2):
Reference Only. Optional. Enter the width of the pallet in your
standard units of measure. Example: Centimeters, Millimeters or
Meters.
Height (7,2):
Reference Only. Optional. Enter the height of the pallet in
your standard units of measure. Example: Centimeters,
Millimeters or Meters.
Optimize Storage On (1,A):
Reference only. Optional. Enter 0 if storage is to be optimized
on length. Enter 1 if storage is to be optimized on width.
Enter 2 if storage is to be optimized on height.
Storage Factor (5,0):
Mandatory. Enter the storage factor that links this pallet to
the notional standard pallet. For example, if 3 standard
pallets fit in a location, then a storage factor of 1.5
indicates that only 2 pallets of a product with this pallet
type may be stored in the location. The default storage factor
is 1.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Pallet Type Master Maintenance Panel
15/08/17 Page
117
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
118
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Pallet Type List
The Pallet Type List (WHM115) provides a printed list of the
Pallet Types in the Warehouse Management System.
At this panel you can list a range of pallet type codes.
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM115-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Pallet Type List USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
*Type desired selection criteria, press Enter
*
*
*
*Pallet Type Code . . . 1 + To 9 +
*
*
*
*
*
*Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
*Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Pallet Type List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
From/To Pallet Type (WINICTD)
15/08/17 Page
119
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Pallet Type List Panel
From/To Pallet Type (1,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up windows.) Enter the From and To
Pallet Types.
Record Status (1,0):
Enter 0 for all records or a 1 for only active records.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Pallet Type List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
120
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Goods Receiving Code Maintenance
The Goods Receiving Code Maintenance (WHM130) selection allows
maintenance of the Goods Receiving Code Master file. These
codes can then be attached to any items that require special
goods receiving requirements. Example: Quarantine periods,
Inspection requirements etc.
Goods Receiving Code Maintenance Panel - WHM130-01
At this panel you can create, revise, copy, delete, display,
print or position to a goods receiving code to maintain on
WHM130-02. You can select records in one of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
121
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM130-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Goods Receiving Code Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
* 5=Display 6=Print 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Goods Record
*
* Act Receiving Code Description Status
*
* __ ___
*
* __ H01 All Hold - Critical Material Active
*
* __ I01 Standard Inspection Routine Active
*
* __ R01 Receipt Direct to Stock Active
*
* __ 001 Default Description '001'. Active
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Bottom...
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F13=Filters
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Goods Receiving Code Maintenance Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Goods Receiving Code (3,A):
Valid Goods Receiving Codes are displayed if they have been
entered into the Warehouse Management System.
15/08/17 Page
122
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
The description associated with each Goods Receiving Code is
displayed.
Record Status (8,A):
An Inactive status is used to show a logically deleted Goods
Receiving Code from the Warehouse Management System.
Available Actions - Goods Receiving Code Maintenance Panel
1=Create
2=Revise
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print
8=Position To
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Goods Receiving Code Maintenance Panel
F13=Filter
Displays the Goods Receiving Code Maintenance Filter window.
This allows for displaying active Goods Receiving Codes.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
123
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Good Receiving Code Maintenance Panel - WHM130-02
This panel allows you to maintain the goods receiving code
description, percentage of deliveries inspected, the timing of
deliveries to be inspected, the quantity or percentage of goods
to inspect, the quarantine time and the location allocatable
during quarantine.
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM130-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Goods Receiving Code Maintenance USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
*
*
* Goods Receiving Code . . . . . . . . . : I01
*
* Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Inspection Routine
*
*
*
* Percentage of Deliveries Inspected . . . 5 %
*
* Inspect Deliveries at Random . . . . . . 1 (0=Fixed Interval, 1=Random)
*
*
*
* Quantity to Inspect. . . . . . . . . . . Pallets*
*
* OR Percentage to Inspect. . . . . . . . . . 5 %
*
*
*
* Quarantine Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Days
*
* Location Allocatable during Quarantine . 0 (0=Non-
Allocatable,1=Allocatable) *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Goods Receiving Code Maintenance Panel
Mode (10,A):
The mode of operation is displayed, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM130-01.
15/08/17 Page
124
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Goods Receiving Code (3,A):
The Goods Receiving Code is displayed as it was entered on
panel WHM130-01.
Description (30,A):
Enter a 30 character description to be used to describe this
Goods Receiving Code. This field cannot be blank.
Percentage of Deliveries to be Inspected (3,0):
Enter a 3 digit percentage figure dictating what percentage of
deliveries are to be inspected. Optional. If a figure greater
than zero is entered, then all deliveries will be inspected.
The value in this field cannot be less than 0.
Inspect Deliveries at Random (1,A):
Enter 0 if delivery inspections are to be done on a fixed
interval basis, or Enter 1 if deliveries are to be inspected
randomly. Optional. Not currently used. The value in this field
must be 0 or 1.
Quantity to Inspect (7,2):
Enter a physical quantity to be inspected from each delivery
that has an inspection carried out on it. This does not need to
be entered if a Percentage to Inspect is entered instead (see
below).
NOTE: The Quantity to Inspect and the Percentage to Inspect
cannot both be greater than 0.
Percentage to Inspect (3,0):
Enter a 3 digit percentage figure dictating what percentage
needs to be inspected from each delivery that has an inspection
carried out on it. This does not need to be entered if a
Quantity to Inspect is entered instead (see above).
15/08/17 Page
125
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
NOTE: The Quantity to Inspect and the Percentage to Inspect
cannot both be greater than 0.
Quarantine Time (5,0):
Enter a 5 digit time in days that goods with this Receiving
Code need to spend in quarantine before they can be released.
Optional. Reference only. The value in this field cannot be
less than 0/.
Location Allocatable during Quarantine (1,A):
Enter 0 if these goods are not available for allocation while
in quarantine, Enter 1 if these goods are available for
allocation while in quarantine. Optional. Reference only. The
value in this field must be 0 or 1.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Goods Receiving Code Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
126
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Goods Receiving Code List
The Goods Receiving Code List (WHM135) provides a printed list
of the Goods Receiving Codes in the Warehouse Management System.
This panel allows you to specify the selection criteria for a
printed lists of Goods Receiving Codes within Warehouse
Management.
15/08/17 Page
127
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM135-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Goods Receiving Code List USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Goods Receiving Code . . ___ + To 999 +
*
*
*
*
*
* Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Goods Receiving Code List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Goods Receiving Code (WINIGRD)
Field Descriptions - Goods Receiving Code List Panel
Goods Receiving Code (3,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a Goods Receiving
Code to be the from value.
15/08/17 Page
128
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
To (3,A):
Enter a Goods Receiving Code to be the to value.
Record Status (1,0):
Enter 0 for all records or a 1 for only active records.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Goods Receiving Code List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
129
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Picking Select Code Maintenance
The Picking Select Code Maintenance (WHM140) selection allows
maintenance of the Picking Select Codes Master file. These
codes can then be attached to any items that require special
pick conditions. e.g., very heavy items may require picking
first. The Picking Select Code is used as a selection option by
Pick Select/Print (WHM530).
Picking Select Code Maintenance Panel - WHM140-01
Use this panel to select Picking Select Codes to maintain. You
can select records in one of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
130
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM140-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Picking Select Code Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
* 5=Display 6=Print 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Picking Record
*
* Act Select Code Description Status
*
* __ _
*
* __ 1 Floor Load - No Pallets Active
*
* __ 5 Fragile Material - Top Load Active
*
* __ 6 Pick on Standard Pallet Type S Active
*
* __ 7 Bottom Load Only Active
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Bottom...
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F13=Filters
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Picking Select Code Maintenance Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Picking Select Code (1,A):
Valid Picking Select Codes are displayed if they have been
entered into the Warehouse Management System.
15/08/17 Page
131
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
The description associated with each Picking Select Code is
displayed.
Record Status (8,A):
An Inactive status is used to show a logically deleted Picking
Select Code from the Warehouse Management System.
Available Actions - Picking Select Code Maintenance Panel
1=Create
2=Revise
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print
8=Position to
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Picking Select Code Maintenance Panel
F13=Filters
Displays the Filter window. This allows for displaying active
Picking Select Codes.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
132
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
15/08/17 Page
133
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Picking Select Code Maintenance Panel - WHM140-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM140-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Picking Select Code Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
* Picking Select Code . . . . . : 1
*
*
*
* Description . . . . . . . . . . Floor load - No Pallets
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Picking Select Code Maintenance Panel
Mode (10,A):
The mode of operation is displayed, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM140-01.
Picking Select Code (1,A):
The Picking Select Code is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM140-01.
15/08/17 Page
134
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
Enter a 30 character description to be used to describe this
Picking Select Code.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Picking Select Code Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
135
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Picking Select Code List
The Picking Selection Code (WHM145) provides a printed list of
the Picking Select Codes in the Warehouse Management System.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM145-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Picking Select Code List USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Picking Select Code . . . _ + To 9 +
*
*
*
*
*
* Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Window - Picking Select Code List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
From/To Picking Select Code (WINIPSD)
15/08/17 Page
136
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Picking Select Code List Panel
From/To Picking Select Code (1,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the Picking
Select Codes to be the from and to values.
Record Status (1,0):
Enter 0 for all records or a 1 for only active records.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Picking Select Code List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
137
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Inventory Status Code Maintenance
The Inventory Status Code Maintenance (WHM160) selection allows
maintenance of the Inventory Status Code Master file and
display of the reserved status codes.
Inventory Status Code Maintenance Panel - WHM160-01
Use the Inventory Status Code Maintenance panel to create and
maintain inventory status codes. You can select records in one
of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
138
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM160-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Inventory Status Code Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
* 5=Display 6=Print 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Inventory
Record *
* Act Status Code Description Alloc Xfer
Status *
* __ X Scrap 0 0
Active *
* __ Y Disposal Authorized 0 0
Active *
* __ 0 Received 1 1
Active *
* __ 1 Inspection 0 0
Active *
* __ 2 Quarantine 0 1
Active *
* __ 3 Extended Quarantine 0 1
Active *
* __ 4 Available 1 1
Active *
* __ 5 In Picking 0 0
Active *
* __ 6 Internal Movement 0 0
Active *
* __ 7 External Movement 0 0
Active *
* __ 8 On Hold 0 0
Active *
* __ 9 Rejected 0 1
Active *
*
Bottom *
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F13=Filters
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Inventory Status Code Maintenance Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Inventory Status Code (1,A):
Valid Inventory Status Codes are displayed if they have been
entered into the Warehouse Management System.
Description (30,A):
The description associated with each Inventory Status Code is
15/08/17 Page
139
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
displayed.
Record Status (8,A):
An Inactive status is used to show a logically deleted
Inventory Status Code from the Warehouse Management System.
Available Actions - Inventory Status Code Maintenance Panel
1=Create
2=Revise
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print
8=Position To
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Inventory Status Code Maintenance Panel
F13=Filters
Displays the Filter window. This allows for displaying active
Inventory Status Codes.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
140
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Inventory Status Code Maintenance Panel - WHM160-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM160-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Inventory Status Code Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
* Inventory Status Code . . . . : 1
*
*
*
* Description . . . . . . . . . . Inspection
*
*
*
* Allocatable . . . . . . . . . . 0 (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
*
*
* Transferable. . . . . . . . . . 0 (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Inventory Status Code Maintenance Panel
Inventory Status Code (1,A):
The Inventory Status Code is displayed as it was entered on
panel WHM160-01.
Description (30,A):
Enter a 30 character description to be used to describe this
Inventory Status Code.
15/08/17 Page
141
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Allocatable (1,A):
Specify whether stock entered against this status code is to be
considered allocatable. Enter 0 for 'No' or 1 for 'Yes.'
Transferable (1,A):
Specify whether the stock entered against this status code is
transferable. Enter 0 for 'No' or 1 for 'Yes.'
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Inventory Status Code Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
142
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Inventory Status Code List
The Inventory Status Code List (WHM165) provides a printed list
of the definitions of the Inventory Status Codes within a
selected from/to range.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM165-01 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/18/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Inventory Status Code List SCHLAG
14:44:28 *
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Inventory Status Code . . _ + To 9 +
*
*
*
*
*
* Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Inventory Status Code List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Inventory Status Code (WINIISD)
15/08/17 Page
143
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Inventory Status Code List Panel
From/To Inventory Status Code (1,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the From
Inventory Status Code and the To Inventory Status Code value.
The From Inventory Status Code may not be greater than the To
Inventory Status value.
Record Status (1,0):
Enter 0 for all records or 1 for only active records.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Inventory Status Code List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
144
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Location Status Code Maintenance
The Location Status Code Maintenance (WHM170) selection allows
maintenance of the Location Status Codes Master file. These
codes can then be attached to locations as a means of
identifying which ones are currently available for use, and to
give a reason why those unavailable cannot be used. The
maintenance program consists of two panels.
Location Status Code Maintenance Panel - WHM170-01
This panel allows you to select a Location Status Code to
maintain.
15/08/17 Page
145
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM170-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Location Status Code Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
* 5=Display 6=Print 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Location Record
*
* Act Status Code Description Status
*
* __ _
*
* __ B Being Emptied Active
*
* __ E Empty Active
*
* __ F Full Active
*
* __ G Being Filled Active
*
* __ I Goods Expected In Active
*
* __ O Goods Expected Out Active
*
* __ T Temporarily Unusable Active
*
* __ X Unusable Active
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Bottom
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F13=Filters
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Location Status Code Maintenance Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Location Status Code (1,A):
Valid Location Status codes are displayed. The following codes
are shipped with BPCS:
B = Being Emptied
E = Empty
F = Full
G = Being Filled
These location codes are used by Main
15/08/17 Page
146
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Storage locations, which are Type = '0'. Any other location
status codes exclude the Main Storage location from receiving
any stock from any movement without an override entered by the
operator. In the case of all other location types, any status
other than blank prevents movement to the location without an
operator override.
Description (30,A):
The description associated with each Location Status Code is
displayed.
Record Status (8,A):
An Inactive status is used to show a logically deleted Location
Status Code from the Warehouse Management System.
Available Actions - Location Status Code Maintenance Panel
1=Create
2=Revise
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print
8=Position To
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Location Status Code Maintenance Panel
F13=Filters
Displays active Location Status Codes.
15/08/17 Page
147
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
148
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Location Status Code Maintenance Panel - WHM170-02
This is the panel on which to maintain the Location Status Code
and the description.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM170-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Location Status Code Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Location Status code . . . . : B
*
*
*
* Description . . . . . . . . . . Being Emptied_________________
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Location Status Code Maintenance Panel
Mode (10,A):
The mode of operation is displayed, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM170-01.
Location Status Code (1,A):
The Location Status Code is displayed as it was entered on
panel WHM170-01.
15/08/17 Page
149
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
Enter a 30 character description to be used to describe this
Location Status Code.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Location Status Code Maintenance Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
150
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Location Status Code List
The Location Status Code Master List (WHM175) provides a
printed list of the Location Status Code Master records in the
Warehouse Management System.
This panel allows you to select a range of Location Status
Codes to list.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM175-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Location Status Code List USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Location Status Code. . . _ + To 9 +
*
*
*
* Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Location Status Code Master List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Location Status Code (WINILSD)
15/08/17 Page
151
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Location Status Code Master List Panel
From/To Location Status Code (1,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the From Location
Status Code and the To Location Status Code. The From Location
Status Code may not be greater than the To Location Status Code.
Record Status (1,0):
Enter 0 for all records or a 1 for only active records.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Location Status Code Master List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
152
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Item/Warehouse Master Maintenance
The Item/Warehouse Maintenance (WHM150) selection allows
maintenance of the Item/Warehouse Master file. Each item to be
stored in a managed warehouse must have an active
Item/Warehouse record. If no such record exists, then it will
not be possible to receive stock for the item into the
warehouse.
NOTE: Warehouse Management does not support Type 6 items
(non-balance) in a managed warehouse. Item Type 6 items cannot
be processed in Order Processing (ORD) when the order header or
order line warehouse is a managed warehouse.
Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel - WHM150-01
Use the Item/Warehouse Maintenance panel to create and maintain
item/warehouse records. You can select records in one of two
ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
153
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM150-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Item/Warehouse Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
* 5=Display 6=Print 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Whs Warehouse Item Item
Record *
* Act Cde Description Number Description
Status *
* __ __ _______________
*
* ED EAST DIST.-D2 FACILI 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ
Active *
* ED EAST DIST.-D2 FACILI 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 12OZ
Active *
* ED EAST DIST.-D2 FACILI 3003 BEEF3 STEW CANNED 8OZ
Active *
* WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FAC 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ
Active *
* WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FAC 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 12OZ
Active *
* WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FAC 3003 BEEF3 STEW CANNED 8OZ
Active *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom... *
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F13=Filters
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Warehouse Code (2,A):
Valid Warehouse Codes are displayed if they have been entered
into the Warehouse Management System.
15/08/17 Page
154
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
The description associated with each Warehouse Code is
displayed.
Item Number (15,A):
Valid Item Numbers are displayed if they have been entered into
the Warehouse Management System.
Item Description (30,A):
The description associated with each Item Number is displayed.
Record Status (8,A):
An Inactive status is used to show a logically deleted
Item/Warehouse record from the Warehouse Management System.
Available Actions - Item/Warehouse Maintenance List Panel
1=Create
2=Revise
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print
8=Position to
15/08/17 Page
155
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Item/Warehouse Maintenance List Panel
F13=Filters
Displays the Filter window. Select the record status (active or
all records), and enter a sequencing option:
1=Warehouse/Item Sequence
2=Item/Warehouse Sequence
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
156
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel - WHM150-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM150-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Item/Warehouse Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Warehouse : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Item. . . : 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 8/CASE
*
*
*
* Preferred Location . . . . + Loose Storage . . . . 0
(0=No,1=Yes) *
* Stack Height . . . . . . . 1 Pallet Pallet Type. . . . . S +
*
* Picking Select Code. . . . 5 + Stock Rotation Code . 0 +
*
* ABC Code . . . . . . . . . __ Goods Receiving Code. R01 +
*
*
*
* Inspection Zone. . . . . . ___ Inspection Location . . ______
+ *
*
*
* Full Pallet Picking . . . 0 (0=Storage 1=Picking)
*
* Allow Split-Pack Picking . 0 Split Pack Location . . ______
+ *
* (0=No 1=Yes)
*
* Default Inv Sts. . . . . . 4 + Received
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Preferred Location (WINILM)
* Picking Select Code (WINIPSD)
* Default Inventory Status (WINIISD)
* Pallet Type (WINICTD)
* Goods Receiving Code (WINIGRD)
* Inspection Location (WINIL2D)
* Split Pack Location (WINIL2D)
15/08/17 Page
157
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel
Mode (10,A):
Displays the mode of operation, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM150-01.
Warehouse Code (2,A):
The Warehouse Code is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM150-01.
Description (30,A):
The warehouse description is displayed as it was displayed on
panel WHM150-01.
Item Number (15,A):
The Item Number is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM150-01.
Item Description (30,A):
The item description is displayed as it was displayed on panel
WHM150-01.
Preferred Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter an active main
storage location that will be the first location checked by the
putaway procedure after picking and replenishment locations.
The entered location must match the item in terms of pallet
types. Optional.
Loose Storage (1,A):
Reference only. If the Minimum Level for Picking is defined as
being the "Unit" level, then this item's storage may also be
defined as being "loose" storage by entering a 1 here. If the
15/08/17 Page
158
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Minimum Level For Picking is not "Unit" level then this must be
a 0.
Stack Height (3,0):
Enter the maximum number of pallets of this item that can be
stacked in this warehouse. A number of 0 means the item cannot
be stored in bulk storage. Mandatory.
Pallet Type (1,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid pallet
type in/on which this item is contained.
Picking Select Code (1,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid picking
select code to indicate any special picking requirements.
Stock Rotation Code (1,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter 0 to use a First
In, First Out algorithm, or Enter 1 to use a First Expiry,
First Out algorithm for stock rotation.
ABC Code (2,A):
Enter the ABC code of this item to denote its average annual
usage. Common ABC codes based upon total monetary value are:
Items in the: ABC code of:
Top 20% of annual monetary usage A
Next 30% of annual monetary usage B
Next 50% of annual monetary usage C
Any criteria may be "rated" by the ABC codes (for example, lead
time, design volatility, and so on). Reference only.
Goods Receiving Code (3,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid goods
15/08/17 Page
159
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
receiving code to indicate any special goods receiving
requirements. Mandatory. The default value is 001.
Inspection Zone (3,A):
Enter the zone within the warehouse that is used for
inspections of this item. This cannot be entered if an
inspection location is entered (see below). Optional. If the
Goods Receiving Code has Percentage of Deliveries to Inspect
greater than zero, then either an Inspection Zone or an
Inspection location must be entered.
Inspection Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter an active
Inspection Location, Type = '5'. This cannot be entered if an
inspection zone is entered (see above). Optional. If the Goods
Receiving Code has Percentage of Deliveries to Inspect greater
than zero, then either an Inspection Zone or an Inspection
location must be entered.
Full Pallet Picking (1,A)
Enter '0' if Full Pallet Picking is from Main Storage and '1'
if Full Pallet Picking is from a Picking Location.
Allow Split-Pack Picking (1,A)
Enter '0' if Split Pack Picking is not allowed and '1' if Split
Pack Picking is allowed. This field is not currently used.
Split Pack Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid location
where these items can be taken from "split- packs". A Split
Pack Picking Location may only be entered if the flag Allow
Split Pack Picking is set to '1'. This field is not currently
used.
15/08/17 Page
160
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Default Inventory Status (1,A)
Specify the default Inventory Status. Valid values are held on
the Inventory Status file. It defaults to the value held at
Warehouse level. This status is assigned to all pallets
received at the warehouse.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
161
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel - WHM150-03
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM150-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/18/93 *
*Revise Item/Warehouse Maintenance SCHLAG
14:20:53 *
*
*
*Warehouse : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
*Item. . . : 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 8/CASE
*
*
*
* Stg Pick Pick Min Qty Replen Replen
Replen *
* Lvls Select Loc in Pick Loc Qty
Level *
* (0,1) (0,1,2) Loc
*
*Pallets : 1 1 PA0000 + 1.000 ______ + 1.000
0 *
*Layers . 0 0 ______ + ____________ ______ +
*
*Cases . 1 2 PA0001 + 32.000 RA0001 +
1.000.1 *
*Inners . 0 0 ______ + ____________ ______ +
*
*Units : 1 2 PA0003 + 256.000 RA0002 +
4.000.3 *
*
*
*Quantity of Cases / Pallets . . . . . . 32.000
*
*Quantity of Units / Outers . . . . . . 8.000
*
*
*
*Volume of : Units or L x W x H
*
*Weight of : Units
*
*
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F14=Multi-Picking
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Picking Location (WINIL2)
* Replenishment Location (WINIL2)
15/08/17 Page
162
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel
Mode (10,A):
The mode of operation is displayed, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM150-01.
Warehouse Code (2,A):
The Warehouse Code is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM150-01.
Description (30,A):
The warehouse description is displayed as it was displayed on
panel WHM150-01.
Item Number (15,A):
The Item Number is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM150-01.
Item Description (30,A):
The item description displays as it displayed on panel
WHM150-01.
Storage Level 1 (e.g. Pallets) (1,A):
Display only. This storage level is always used.
Storage Level 2 (e.g.Layers) (1,A):
Enter 0 to indicate that this storage level is not used, or a 1
to indicate that this storage level is used.
Storage Level 3 (e.g.Outers) (1,A):
Enter 0 to indicate that this storage level is not used, or a 1
to indicate that this storage level is used.
15/08/17 Page
163
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Storage Level 4 (e.g. Inners) (1,A):
Enter 0 to indicate that this storage level is not used, or a 1
to indicate that this storage level is used.
Storage Level 5 (e.g. Units) (1,A):
Display only. This storage level is always used.
Pick Select Storage Level 1 (1,A):
The Pick Select has three valid values. These are:
* '0' - There is no specific area in the warehouse for picking.
* '1' - Dedicated pick locations are specified and are
replenished from a designated storage level.
* '2' - Dedicated pick locations are specified and are
replenished from specific replenishment locations.
Pick Select Storage Level 2 (1,A):
As Pick Select 1, but for Storage Level 2.
Pick Select Storage Level 3 (1,A):
As Pick Select 1, but for Storage Level 3.
Pick Select Storage Level 4 (1,A):
As Pick Select 1, but for Storage Level 4.
Pick Select Storage Level 5 (1,A):
As Pick Select 1, but for Storage Level 5.
Picking Location Storage Level 1 (6,A)
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select 1 is
zero, this must be blank; else a Picking Location with a
15/08/17 Page
164
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Location status of ' ' must be entered. This Picking Location
must be unique to this item and may not be used for any other
multiple pick location at this storage level, or for any other
level in this item.
Picking Location Storage Level 2 (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select 2 is
zero, this must be blank; else a Picking Location with a
Location status of ' ' must be entered. This Picking Location
must be unique to this item and may not be used for any other
multiple pick location at this storage level, or for any other
level in this item.
Picking Location Storage Level 3 (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select 3 is
zero, this must be blank; else a Picking Location with a
Location status of ' ' must be entered. This Picking Location
must be unique to this item and may not be used for any other
multiple pick location at this storage level, or for any other
level in this item.
Picking Location Storage Level 4 (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select 4 is
zero, this must be blank; else a Picking Location with a
Location status of ' ' must be entered. This Picking Location
must be unique to this item and may not be used for any other
multiple pick location at this storage level, or for any other
level in this item.
Picking Location Storage Level 5 (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select 5 is
zero, this must be blank; else a Picking Location with a
Location status of ' ' must be entered. This Picking Location
must be unique to this item and may not be used for any other
multiple pick location at this storage level, or for any other
level in this item.
15/08/17 Page
165
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Storage Level 1 (Pallet) Minimum Quantity Picking Location
(11,3)
A value must be entered as the Minimum Quantity allowed in a
Picking Location if Pick Select is '1' or '2'.
Storage Level 2 (Layer) Minimum Quantity Picking Location
(11,3):
A value must be entered as the Minimum Quantity allowed in a
Picking Location if Pick Select is '1' or '2'.
Storage Level 3 (Outer) Minimum Quantity Picking Location
(11,3):
A value must be entered as the Minimum Quantity allowed in a
Picking Location if Pick Select is '1' or '2'.
Storage Level 4 (Inner) Minimum Quantity in Picking Location
(11,3):
A value must be entered as the Minimum Quantity allowed in a
Picking Location if Pick Select is '1' or '2'.
Storage Level 5 (Unit) Minimum Quantity in Picking Location
(11,3):
A value must be entered as the Minimum Quantity allowed in a
Picking Location if Pick Select is '1' or '2'.
Replenishment Location Storage Level 1 (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select is '0'
or '1', this must be blank. If Pick Select is 2, enter a
Replenishment Location with a Location status of ' ' must be
entered. This Replenishment Location must be unique to this
item and may not be used at any other level in this item. This
location will be used to replenish the Picking Location(s) at
this level that will be used to replenish the Picking
Location(s).
15/08/17 Page
166
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Replenishment Location Storage Level 2 (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select is '0'
or '1', this must be blank. If Pick Select is 2, enter a
Replenishment Location with a Location status of ' ' must be
entered. This Replenishment Location must be unique to this
item and may not be used at any other level in this item. This
location will be used to replenish the Picking Location(s) at
this level.
Replenishment Location Storage Level 3 (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select is '0'
or '1', this must be blank. If Pick Select is 2, enter a
Replenishment Location with a Location status of ' ' must be
entered. This Replenishment Location must be unique to this
item and may not be used at any other level in this item. This
location will be used to replenish the Picking Location(s) at
this level.
Replenishment Location Storage Level 4 (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select is '0'
or '1', this must be blank. If Pick Select is 2, a
Replenishment Location with a Location status of ' ' must be
entered. This Replenishment Location must be unique to this
item and may not be used at any other level in this item. This
location will be used to replenish the Picking Location(s) at
this level.
Replenishment Location Storage Level 5 (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) If Pick Select is '0'
or '1', this must be blank. If Pick Select is 2, a
Replenishment Location with a Location status of ' ' must be
entered. This Replenishment Location must be unique to this
item and may not be used at any other level in this item. This
location will be used to replenish the Picking Location(s) at
this level.
15/08/17 Page
167
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Storage Level 1 (Pallet) Replenishment Quantity (11,3):
The Quantity by which the Picking Location is to be
replenished. This quantity is in terms of the storage level
indicated by the Replenishment level flag.
Storage Level 2 (Layer) Replenishment Quantity (11,3):
The Quantity by which the Picking Location is to be
replenished. This quantity is in terms of the storage level
indicated by the Replenishment level flag.
Storage Level 3 (Outer) Replenishment Quantity (11,3):
The Quantity by which the Picking Location is to be
replenished. This quantity is in terms of the storage level
indicated by the Replenishment level flag.
Storage Level 4 (Inner) Replenishment Quantity (11,3):
The Quantity by which the Picking Location is to be
replenished. This quantity is in terms of the storage level
indicated by the Replenishment level flag.
Storage Level 5 (Unit) Replenishment Quantity (11,3):
The Quantity by which the Picking Location is to be
replenished. This quantity is in terms of the storage level
indicated by the Replenishment level flag.
Replenishment Level Storage Level 1 (1,A):
Only one value is possible:
* 0 = Replenishment is from Main Storage.
Replenishment Level Storage Level 2 (1,A):
Two values are possible:
15/08/17 Page
168
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
* 0 = Replenishment is from Main Storage.
* 1 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 1
Replenishment Level Storage Level 3 (1,A):
Three values are possible:
* 0 = Replenishment is from Main Storage.
* 1 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 1
* 2 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 2
Replenishment Level Storage Level 4 (1,A):
Four values are possible:
* 0 = Replenishment is from Main Storage.
* 1 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 1
* 2 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 2
* 3 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 3
Replenishment Level Storage Level 5 (1,A):
Five values are possible:
* 0 = Replenishment is from Main Storage.
* 1 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 1
* 2 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 2
* 3 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 3
* 4 = Replenishment is from Storage Level 4
Quantities Per Storage Level (11,3):
Enter the relationship between each storage level in terms of
15/08/17 Page
169
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
the next level down. Example: 12 Units per Inner.
The number of levels of storage are defined on the same panel
(WHM150-03) and relate to the number of lines displayed.
Example: If only storage levels 5, 3 and 1 are used (Units,
Outers and Pallets), then two lines will be shown reading
"Units/Outer" and "Outers/Pallet". All values shown are
mandatory, and must be greater than 0.
Volume (11,3):
Enter the volume of this item at the level defined as the
minimum for picking on this panel (WHM150-03). The unit of
measure is the standard used by your company. e.g., Cubic
meters. This cannot be entered if the item's dimensions are
entered instead (see below). Mandatory only if volumetric
picking by volume is used by the warehouse.
Dimensions (7,2):
Enter the length, width and height of this item at the level
defined as the minimum for picking on the same panel
(WHM150-03). The unit of measure is the standard used by your
company. e.g., meters. These cannot be entered if the item's
volume was entered instead (see above). Mandatory only if
volumetric picking by volume is used by the warehouse.
Weight (7,3):
Enter the weight of the item at the level defined as the
minimum for picking on the previous panel (WHM150-02). The unit
of measure is the standard used by your company. e.g.,
Kilograms. Mandatory only if volumetric picking by weight is
used by the warehouse.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel
F14=Multi-picking
Displays the Multiple Picking Location Maintenance window.
15/08/17 Page
170
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
171
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Item/Warehouse Maintenance Panel - WHM150-04
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM150-04 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/20/93 *
* Revise Item/Warehouse Maintenance SCHLAG
11:27:26 *
*
*
* Warehouse : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Item. . . : 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 8/CASE
*
*
*
*
*
* Define Allowable Locations:
*
* Location
*
* Locations OR Zones OR Categories Flexibility Code (1,5)
*
* +
*
* +
*
* +
*
* +
*
* +
*
* +
*
* +
*
* +
*
* +
*
* +
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Item/Master Maintenance Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Locations (WINILM)
Field Descriptions - Item/Master Maintenance Panel
Mode (10,A):
The mode of operation is displayed, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM150-01.
15/08/17 Page
172
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Code (2,A):
The Warehouse Code is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM150-01.
Description (30,A):
The warehouse description is displayed as it was displayed on
panel WHM150-01.
Item Number (15,A):
The Item Number is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM150-01.
Item Description (30,A):
The item description is displayed as it was displayed on panel
WHM150-01.
Locations (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the Main Storage
locations with a status code of B, E, F, or G where this item
would normally be stored, or where this item cannot be stored.
If Locations are entered, Zones and Location Categories must
not be entered (see below). Optional.
Zones (3,A):
Enter the valid Zones within the warehouse where this item
would normally be stored, or where this item cannot be stored.
If zones are entered, Locations and Location Categories must
not be entered (see below). Optional.
Location Categories (2,A):
Enter the Location Categories of the locations within the
warehouse where this item would normally be stored, or where
this item cannot be stored. If Location Categories are entered,
then Locations and Zones must not be entered (see above).
15/08/17 Page
173
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Optional.
Flexibility Code (1,A):
1 = Only at the location/zone/location category specified.
5 = Not at the location/zone/location category specified.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Item/Master Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
174
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Multiple Picking Location Maintenance
Multiple Picking Location Maintenance (WHM151) allows the entry
of multiple locations for the particular Picking level selected
from Item/Warehouse Maintenance (WHM150).
15/08/17 Page
175
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM150-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/18/93 *
* Revise Item/Warehouse Maintenance SCHLAG
11:30:40 *
*
*
* Warehouse : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Item. . . : 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 8/CASE
*
*
*
* Stg Pick
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX *
* Lvls SelecXX WHM151-01 Multiple Picking Location
Maintenance XX *
* (0,1) (0,1,XX Level= 1 Pallets
XX *
* Pallets : 1 2 XX Actions: 1=Create 4=Delete 8=Position To
XX *
* Layers . 0 0 XX Act Sequence Location
XX *
* Outers . 0 0 XX
XX *
* Inners . 0 0 XX 10 LOC1
XX *
* Units : 1 0 XX
XX *
* XX
XX *
* Quantity of Units /XX
XX *
* XX
XX *
* XX Bottom
XX *
* XX F1=Help F6=Confirm F7=Backwards
XX *
* Volume of : Units XX F8=Forwards F12=Cancel
XX *
* Weight of : Units
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX *
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F14=Multi-Picking
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Multiple Picking Location Window
Action (2,A):
Enter an action code at the top of the panel:
Sequence (3,0):
Enter a sequence number for each picking location entered.
Location (6,A):
Enter a valid Picking location with a blank location status
that has not been used as Picking location anywhere else.
15/08/17 Page
176
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Available Actions - Multiple Picking Location Window
1=Create
4=Delete
8=Position To
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Multiple Picking Location Window
F6=Accept
Accepts the entries made.
F7=Roll Backward
Rolls backwards, displaying earlier records.
F8=Roll Forward
Rolls forward, displaying additional records.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
177
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Item/Warehouse Master List
The Item/Warehouse Master List (WHM155) provides a printed list
of the Item/Warehouse Master records in the Warehouse
Management System.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM155-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Item/Warehouse Master List USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse Code . . . . . __ + To 99 +
*
*
*
* Item Code . . . . . . . _______________ + To 999999999999999
+ *
*
*
*
*
* Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Item/Warehouse Master List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse Code (WINIWM)
* Item Code (WINIIM)
15/08/17 Page
178
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Item/Warehouse Master List Panel
From/To Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the From
Warehouse Code and the To Warehouse Code. The From Warehouse
Code may not be greater than the To Warehouse Code.
From/To Item (15,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the From Item
Number and the To Item Number. The From Item Number may not be
greater than the To Item Number.
Record Status (1,0):
Enter 0 for all records or a 1 for only active records.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Item/Warehouse Master List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
179
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Booking In
The Booking In (WHM500) selection allows creation, maintenance
and cancellation of delivery bookings in the Warehouse
Management System.
After selection of a warehouse from the first panel, a list of
deliveries due will be displayed in date / time order, starting
with the earliest expected delivery for the current system
date. All deliveries more than 30 minutes overdue will be
highlighted.
A delivery may be selected from this display by entry of an
action code against it or by entry of an action code and
required delivery details in the top entry fields of the
display.
Upon selection of a delivery, if the Print Check-in Notes
action was requested these will then be produced. However, if
other actions were requested, a fourth screen is displayed
listing all orders which make up the expected delivery. If the
Create or Revise action was selected the delivery description
and expected receiving location may also be entered at this
stage.
15/08/17 Page
180
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Warehouse Panel - WHM500-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM500-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Booking-In USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . . . WD +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Select Warehouse Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following field:
Warehouse (WINIWM)
Field Descriptions - Select Warehouse Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Select a valid
warehouse for processing.
15/08/17 Page
181
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Warehouse Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
182
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Deliveries Due Panel - WHM500-02
You can select records in one of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
183
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM500-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
*
*MM/DD/YY
*
* CPU Booking-In USER
*
*HH:MM:SS
*
*
*
* Warehouse . . : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 4=Cancel 5=Display
*
* 6=Print Check-in Notes
*
*
*
* Act Date Time Locn Delivery + Description
*
*
*
* 10/14/93 12:00 DEFREC 1 Standard Delivery
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward
F12=Cancel *
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Select Deliveries Due Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Delivery Number (WINIDHD)
Field Descriptions - Select Deliveries Due Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
15/08/17 Page
184
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Date (6,0):
Expected delivery dates are displayed in ascending order.
Time (4,0):
Expected delivery times (in 24 hour notation) are displayed in
ascending order.
Delivery Number (6,0):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) The delivery numbers of
the expected deliveries are displayed.
Description (30,A):
The description of each of the expected deliveries is displayed.
Available Actions - Select Deliveries Due Panel
1=Create
2=Revise
4=Cancel
5=Display
6=Print Check-in Notes
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Deliveries Due Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
185
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Maintain Deliveries Panel - WHM500-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM500-03 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD
* CPU Booking-In USER
HH:MM
*
*
* Enter data and press Enter.
*
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Delivery . . . . . . . . . . : 1
*
* Description . . . . . . . . . . Standard Delivery
*
* Expected Date . . . . . . . . . 10/14/93
*
* From Time . . . . . . . . . . . 12:00
*
* To Time . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:00
*
* Receiving Location . . . . . . DEREC +
*
* Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Maintain Deliveries Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following field:
Receiving Location (WINIL2D)
Field Descriptions - Maintain Deliveries Panel
Mode (10,A):
The mode of operation is displayed, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM500-02.
15/08/17 Page
186
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Code (2,A):
The Warehouse Code is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM500-01.
Warehouse Description (30,A):
The description of the selected warehouse is displayed.
Delivery Number (6,0):
The selected delivery number is displayed.
Delivery Description (30,A):
Enter the description to be associated with this delivery
number.
Expected Date (6,0):
Enter the expected delivery date. This must not be less than
the current system date.
From/To Time (4,0):
Enter the expected delivery times. They should be valid times
in the 24-hour format.
Receiving Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the receiving
location. This must exist on file and be defined as either a
receiving bay or loading bay. This location must have a blank
status. If it is not blank, an override message will appear. If
this override function is accepted the location status will be
set to blank.
Carrier (10,A):
Enter the carrier associated with this delivery.
15/08/17 Page
187
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Maintain Deliveries Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
188
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Display Orders Panel - WHM500-04
You can select records in one of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
189
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM500-04 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Booking-In USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Warehouse . . : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Delivery . . : 1 Standard Delivery
*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 4=Cancel 5=Display
*
*
*
* Order Order
*
* Act Typ + Number + Description
*
* __ _
*
* 1 800981 Purchase Order AMERICAN FOODS INC
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Accept F7=Backward
F8=Forward *
* F12=Cancel F14=Accept and Select Order Lines F24=More Keys
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Display Orders Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Order Type (WINIOTD)
* Order Number (The appropriate window will
appear based on the Order Type you enter.)
Field Descriptions - Display Orders Panel
Mode (10,A):
The mode of operation is displayed, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM500-02.
15/08/17 Page
190
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse Code (2,A):
The Warehouse Code is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM500-01.
Description (30,A):
The description of the selected warehouse is displayed.
Delivery Number (6,0):
The selected delivery number is displayed.
Delivery Description (30,A):
The description associated with this delivery number is
displayed.
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Order Type (1,A):
For each order entered, specify the associated order type.
Valid values are:
* '1' - Purchase Order
* '2' - Resupply Order
* '3' - Unscheduled Receipt.
Order Number (6,0):
Enter the order numbers which go to make up the delivery. The
order numbers entered are validated according to the type of
the order
15/08/17 Page
191
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Available Actions - Display Orders Panel
1=Create
4=Cancel
5=Display
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Display Orders Panel
F14=Accept and Select
Accept and select order lines and continue to panel WHM50005.
F15=Create Unscheduled Receipt
Create an unscheduled receipt through WHM650.
F18=Accept and Print Check-In Note
Accept the entries made and print a check-in note.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
192
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Order Lines Panel - WHM500-05
Select records by entering the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. You can specify an
action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
193
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM500-05 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Booking-In USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
* Warehouse . . : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Delivery . . : 1 Standard Delivery
*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 11=Select 13=De-Select
*
*
*
* Order Order Expected
*
* Act Number Type Item Description Quantity
U/M Sts*
* 800981 1 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 525.000 CS
*SEL *
* 800981 1 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 12OZ 600.000 CS
*SEL *
* 800981 1 3003 BEEF3 STEW CANNED 8OZ 1 800.000 CS
*SEL *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward
F12=Cancel *
* F13=Filters F14=Accept and Print Check-In Note F18=Select All
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Select Order Lines Panel
Mode (10,A):
The mode of operation is displayed, depending upon the action
selected on panel WHM500-02.
Warehouse Code (2,A):
The Warehouse Code is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM500-01.
15/08/17 Page
194
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
The description of the selected warehouse is displayed.
Delivery Number (6,0):
The selected delivery number is displayed.
Delivery Description (30,A):
The description associated with this delivery number is
displayed.
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Expected Quantity (9,2):
Enter the expected quantity for the order line to be attached
to the delivery.
Unit of Measure (2,A):
Enter the Unit of Measure associated with the Expected
quantity. This must be the Stocking or Purchasing Unit of
Measure.
Available Actions - Select Order Lines Panel
11=Select
Select order lines for further processing.
13=De-select
De-select order lines from further processing.
15/08/17 Page
195
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS- Select Order Lines Panel
F13=Filters
Displays the Booking-In Filter Panel (WHM50006) which prompts
for a range of item numbers.
F14=Accept and Print Check-In Note
Accepts the entries made and prints a Check-in note.
F18=Select All
Selects all order lines on the panel.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
196
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Goods Receiving
The Goods Receiving (WHM510) selection allows goods receiving
for items grouped together by a common delivery number. The
delivery may span several order numbers.
If you select a warehouse and use F9 to specify that a new
delivery number is required, WHM500 is called to allow the
entry of order details against a delivery number. The delivery
number is automatically assigned.
Having completed entry of data to this screen, or having
entered both the warehouse and delivery number on the first
screen, a second panel is displayed allowing more detailed
information to be entered against the delivery at header level.
Upon successful completion of this, a third panel is displayed
allowing detailed quantity receipt / reject values to be
entered against a particular order on the delivery.
15/08/17 Page
197
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Warehouse and Delivery Panel - WHM510-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM510-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Goods Receiving USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
* Type Desired Selection Criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse __ +
*
* Delivery ______ +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Add Delivery F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Select Warehouse and Delivery Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Warehouse (WINIWM)
Delivery (WINIDHD)
15/08/17 Page
198
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Select Warehouse and Delivery Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Select a valid
warehouse to receive the delivery. The warehouse must be a
managed warehouse and the user must be authorized to it.
Delivery Number (6,0):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Select a delivery
number for processing unless you are adding a delivery.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Warehouse and Delivery Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
199
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Enter Delivery Header Information Panel - WHM510-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM510-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Goods Receiving USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Delivery 1 Standard Delivery
*
* Expected Date 10/14/93
*
* From Time 12:00
*
* To Time 13:00
*
* Receiving Location DEFREC
*
* Carrier
*
* Actual Date 10/14/93
*
* From Time 9:18
*
* To Time 10:18
*
* Receiving Location REJECT +
*
* Rejection Location ______ +
*
* Bill of Lading Number __________________
*
* Transaction Comment _______________
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Enter Delivery Header Information Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following field:
* Receiving Location (WINIL2D)
* Rejection Location (WINIL2D)
15/08/17 Page
200
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Enter Delivery Header Information Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
The Warehouse Code is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM510-01. The warehouse description is also displayed.
Delivery (6,0):
The selected delivery number is displayed. If a new delivery
was specified, the new delivery number which the system has
generated will be displayed here. The delivery description is
also displayed.
Expected Date (6,0):
The value entered in WHM500 is displayed.
Expected From/To Time (4,0):
The values entered in WHM500 is displayed.
Expected Receiving Location (6,A):
The value entered in WHM500 is displayed.
Carrier (10,A):
The value entered in WHM500 is displayed.
Actual Date (6,0):
Enter the actual delivery date. This value will be validated.
Actual From Time (4,0):
Enter the expected delivery time. This should be a valid time
in the 24 hour format and defaults to the current time.
15/08/17 Page
201
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Actual To Time (4,0):
Enter the expected delivery time. This should be a valid time
in the 24 hour format and defaults to the current time plus the
difference between expected from and to times.
Receiving Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the actual
receiving location. The value defaults to the expected
location. The value must be a receiving location or loading
bay. This location must have a blank status. If it is not
blank, an override message will appear. If this override
function is accepted the location status will be set to blank.
Rejection Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the rejection
location. The value defaults from the warehouse default reject
location. The value must be a rejection location. This
location must have a blank status. If it is not blank, an
override message will appear. If this override function is
accepted the location status will be set to blank.
Bill of Lading Number (18,A):
This entry is not validated.
Transaction Comment (10,A):
Enter the value which you want to appear on the transaction
records. These records are visible through the Material Status
Inquiry. (INV300)
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Enter Delivery Header Information Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
202
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Enter Delivery Detail Information Panel - WHM510-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM510-03 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Goods Receiving USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
* Warehouse WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Delivery 1 Standard Delivery
*
*
*
* Order Received Rejected No.
Close*
* No./Typ Item Lot Quantity Quantity U/M Pallet
Line *
* 800981 1 3001 525.000 .000 CS 3
0 *
* 800981 1 3002 600.000 .000 CS 9
0 *
* 800981 1 3003 800.000 .000 CS 17
0 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F11=Fold F12=Cancel
*
* F15=P.O. Inquiry F16=Unsched Recpt Inquiry F17=Cust Ord Inquiry
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Enter Delivery Detail Information Panel
Warehouse Code (2,A):
The Warehouse Code is displayed as it was entered on panel
WHM510-01. The description of the selected warehouse is also
displayed.
Delivery Number (6,0):
The selected delivery number is displayed. If a new delivery
15/08/17 Page
203
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
was specified, the new delivery number which the system has
generated will be displayed here. The delivery description is
also displayed.
Order Number (6,0):
Orders associated with the delivery are shown here.
Order Type (1,A):
For each order, an order type is specified. Valid values are:
* '1' - Purchase Order
* '2' - Resupply Order
* '3' - Unscheduled Receipts
Item (15,A):
The Item number associated with the order is displayed.
Lot (10,A):
Enter the lot number where the received stock is to be
assigned. If API automatic lot number generation is set in the
system parameters, a lot number will automatically be assigned.
Received Quantity (11,3):
Enter the total quantity received. This includes any quantity
rejected such that: if rcvd = 10 & rjct = 3 then 7 are good.
Rejected Quantity (11,3):
Enter the quantity of the item rejected for this order.
Unit of Measure (2,A):
The unit of measure for this item is displayed.
15/08/17 Page
204
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Actual Pallets (7,0):
The number of pallets required for the accepted quantity of the
item is calculated and displayed.
Close Line (1,A):
Enter 0 to leave the delivery line open. Enter 1 to close the
delivery line.
Fold Line (accessed using F11=Fold)
Inventory Status (1,A):
Enter the Inventory status to be attached to any pallet
generated as a result of this receipt.
Item Description (30,A):
The order line item description is displayed.
Reason Code (2,0):
Enter the reason code.
Rejection Location (6,A):
Enter the actual rejection location. This will be defaulted
from the previous panel. This location must have a blank
status. If it is not blank, an override message will appear. If
this override function is accepted the location status will be
set to blank.
Vendor Lot Number (10,A):
If the item is lot-controlled, you may enter the vendor's lot
number.
15/08/17 Page
205
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Enter Delivery Detail Information Panel
F15=P.O. Inquiry
Access the Purchase Order Inquiry panel.
F16=Unsched Recpt Inquiry
Access Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance.
F17=Cust Order Inquiry
Access Customer Order Inquiry.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
206
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance
Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance (WHM650) allows you to
maintain unscheduled receipts. Unscheduled receipt numbers are
automatically assigned to newly-created unscheduled receipts.
This is done by incrementing the value maintained in the field,
"Unscheduled Receipts Last Number Used" of the Warehouse
Management Parameters panel (WHM820D-01).
15/08/17 Page
207
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Unscheduled Receipts Selection Panel - WHM650-01
You can select records in one of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
208
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM650-01 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/18/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Unscheduled Receipts Selection SCHLAG
16:44:18*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
* 5=Display 8=Position To 11=Revise Lines
*
*
*
* Unscheduled
*
* Act Receipt Vendor Name Comment Entry Date
Sts *
* __ _______
*
* __ 104 NATIONAL INKS INCORP NO PO - FORWARD TO P 10/12/93
1 *
* __ 105 UTILITIES INCORPORAT VERIFY ITEM DESCRIPT 10/12/93
1 *
* __ 106 UNIVERSAL CAN COMPANY 10/12/93
1 *
* __ 107 Midwest Supply Corpo UNSCHEDULED RECEIPT 10/12/93
1 *
* __ 108 SOUTH DAKOTA BEEF 10/14/93
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Bottom...
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Unscheduled Receipts Selection Panel
Action Code (2,0):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Unscheduled Receipt Number (6,0):
Key the unscheduled receipt number for the desired action. If
you are adding a new unscheduled receipt BPCS assigns the
number.
15/08/17 Page
209
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Record status (1,A):
The status of the Unscheduled Receipt is displayed.
* '1' - Entered
* '2' - At least one line has been received
* '3' - All lines have been fully received
Available Actions - Unscheduled Receipts Selection Panel
Standard:
1=Create
2=Revise
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
8=Position
Additional:
11=Revise Lines
Revise the data for the unscheduled receipt.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Unscheduled Receipts Selection Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
Processing Options
15/08/17 Page
210
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Unscheduled Receipts Header Panel - WHM650-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM650-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
* UR Number 108
*
* Vendor Number 30100 +
*
* Vendor Name SOUTH DAKOTA BEEF
*
* Entry Date 10/14/93
*
* Warehouse WD +
*
* Company
*
* UR Source __
*
* UR Type _
*
* Comment ______________________________
*
* Close Date 0/00/00
*
* Status 1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Unscheduled Receipts Header Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Vendor Number (WINAVM)
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
15/08/17 Page
211
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Unscheduled Receipts Header Panel
UR Number (6,0):
BPCS displays the unscheduled receipt number for this U.R.
Vendor Number (5,0):
Vendor number that the items on this U.R. are being purchased
from.
Vendor Name (30,A):
BPCS displays the vendor name defined for the selected vendor
number.
Entry Date (6,0):
Entry date for this unscheduled receipt. This is display only,
and defaults to today's date.
Warehouse (2,A):
This field identifies the warehouse to receive the ordered
items. Normally, the receiving warehouse is the "Mass Release
Warehouse" defined for the receiving facility.
Company (2,0):
BPCS displays the company number defined for this vendor.
UR Source (2,A):
Reference only.
UR Type (1,A):
Reference only.
15/08/17 Page
212
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Comment (30,A):
Key any user-defined comment to describe the goods. This
comment is stored in the Item Transaction History (ITH) file.
Close Date (6,0)
Date Unscheduled Receipt closed. Display only.
Status (1,0):
Unscheduled Receipt Status.
* '1' - Entered
* '2' - At least one line has been received
* '3' - All lines have been fully received
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
213
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Unscheduled Receipts Detail Panel - WHM650-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM650-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/11/93 *
* Revise Unscheduled Receipts Maintenance SCHLAG
11:19:47 *
*
*
* U.R. 108 Vendor 30100 SOUTH DAKOTA BEEF Lines 1
*
* Status 1 Warehouse WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 3=Copy 4=Delete
*
*
*
* Act Line Item + Description Due Date Quantity
UM Sts *
* 1 S420 Invalid item number. 10/14/93 18.000
EA 1 *
* .000
*
* 000
*
* .000
*
* .000
*
* .000
*
* .000
*
* .000
*
* .000
*
* .000
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Accept F7=Backward
F8=Forward *
* F12=Cancel F22=Header
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Unscheduled Receipts Detail Panel
Press the F4 key to access a window for the following field:
Item Number (WINIIM)
Field Descriptions - Unscheduled Receipts Detail Panel
Action Code (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
15/08/17 Page
214
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Line (3,0):
Unscheduled receipt line number. System generated.
Item (15,A):
Item number code for this unscheduled receipt line. An invalid
item may be entered. A skeletal , deleted, item record is
created for invalid items, which must be updated and validated
using INV100 before the item can be used within the system. The
invalid items are placed in the invalid item location in the
warehouse and cannot be moved until they have been validated.
Due Date (6,0)
This is the day the Unscheduled item is due. This date cannot
be before today's date.
Quantity (11,3)
This is the quantity for the unscheduled item. This may be zero.
U/M (2,A)
This is the unit of measure of the item. Dependant upon the
Default Unit of Measure on the Warehouse Master File, the unit
of measure will either be displayed in stocking or purchasing.
If the Item is an invalid item, the unit of measure will
default to EA.
Warehouse (2,A)
This defaults to the unscheduled receipt warehouse and may be
overridden. If the item is invalid this may only be the
unscheduled receipt warehouse.
Status (1,A):
This is display only, and shows the status of the line.
* '1' - Entered
15/08/17 Page
215
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
* '2' - Partially received
* '3' - Fully received
Available Actions - Unscheduled Receipts Detail Panel
3=Copy
4=Delete
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Unscheduled Receipts Detail Panel
F22=Header
Displays Unscheduled Receipts Header panel (WHM65002)
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
216
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Putaway
The Putaway (WHM620) selection allows pallets to be put away
from any type A or type 4-9 location to any valid location
within a Warehouse Managed Warehouse.
Upon selection of a warehouse and location, all pallets in that
location will be displayed in Pallet ID sequence.
Any or all pallets can then be flagged to be putaway manually
to a particular location, or the system can recommend locations
to put each pallet away to.
15/08/17 Page
217
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Locations and Deliveries Panel - WHM620-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM620-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Putaway USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse Code . . . . . __ +
*
* Location . . . . . . . . ______ +
*
* Delivery Number . . . . . ______ +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F14=Putaway
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Select Locations and Deliveries Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* Location (WINIL2D)
* Delivery Number (WINID2D)
15/08/17 Page
218
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Select Locations and Deliveries Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Select a valid
warehouse for processing.
Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Select a valid location
within the above warehouse. This location must be of types "4"
to "9" and "A"; where:
* Type "A" = Rejection Location
* Type "4" = Manufacturing Location (not yet implemented)
* Type "5" = Inspection Location
* Type "6" = Shipping Location
* Type "7" = Receiving Location
* Type "8" = Loading Bay
* Type "9" = Consolidation Area
Delivery Number (6,0):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Select a valid delivery
number for the entered warehouse & location. This selection
criteria is optional.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Locations and Deliveries Panel
F14=Putaway
A delivery number must be entered for this function to be
allowed. The second screen will be displayed, with all the
pallet records for the entered warehouse, location & delivery
number entered. All the records will be "Selected" for
movement, and the recommended movement To Locations will be
already entered.
15/08/17 Page
219
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
220
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Putaway Panel - WHM620-02
Select records by entering the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. You can specify an
action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM620-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/18/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Putaway SCHLAG
16:43:20*
*
*
* Warehouse: WD Location: DEFREC Delivery No: 1 Putaway No:
3 *
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 11=Select 13=De-Select
*
*
*
* To
*
* Act UPI Item Description Quantity Locn +
Status *
* __ 1 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 13.000 ___
*
* __ 2 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 256.000 ___
*
* __ 3 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 256.000 ___
*
* __ 4 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 24.000 ___
*
* __ 5 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 72.000 ___
*
* __ 6 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 72.000 ___
*
* __ 7 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 72.000 ___
*
* __ 8 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 72.000 ___
*
* __ 9 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 72.000 ___
*
* __ 10 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 72.000 ___
*
* __ 11 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED 72.000 ___
*
*
More..*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward
F12=Cancel *
* F14=Select All F15=Auto Putaway F16=Manual Putaway F24=More Keys
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Putaway Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
To Location (WINIL2D)
15/08/17 Page
221
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Valid location types are 0, 1, 2, 5, 7, and A.
Field Descriptions - Putaway Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
This is the Warehouse entered on panel WHM620-01.
Location (6,A):
This is the From Location entered on panel WHM620-01.
Delivery Number (6,0):
This is the Delivery Number selection entered on panel
WHM620-01.
Putaway Number (6,0):
This is the Putaway/Movement Number that will be used as a
reference for all the movement requests madde from this panel
at this time.
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
UPI (9,0):
This is the Unique Pallet Identifer Number that identifies each
pallet in the requested From Location.
Item (15,A):
This is the BPCS item number of the part on this Pallet.
15/08/17 Page
222
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (19,A):
This is the first part of the item description for this BPCS
item number.
Quantity (9,2):
This is the quantity (in stocking units of measure) of this
item on this pallet.
To Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window) If the putaway is to be
performed manually select a
palletized location, with the exception of Receiving Type =
'7', that has location status of blank if it is not Main
Storage Type = '0'. If it is Main Storage, then the location
status must be 'B' or 'G'.
If the location selected is of a valid type, but the
location status is not acceptable, as defined previously, an
override message is displayed with all the errors flagged. If
the override is selected, the location status is set to blank
for any location type other than Main Storage, or to 'E' or 'G'
if the location is Main Storage, and the remainder of the move
is processed normally.
Status (10,A):
This shows the status of each pallet within this location.
Displaying whether the pallet is selected for a move or not,
and whether the putaway algorithm managed or failed to find a
suitable location to move/putaway this pallet to.
Available Actions - Putaway Panel
11=Select
13=De-select
15/08/17 Page
223
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Putaway Panel
F14=Select All
Marks every pallet within the location as "Selected" to be
moved/putaway.
F15=Auto Putaway
Calls the putaway algorithm to recommend locations to
move/putaway each pallet to.
F16=Manual Putaway
Validates the manually entered To Locations. Allows a location
to be chosen as the To Location for a given pallet that might
not have been chosen by the putaway algorithm. Allows pallets
to be moved to specific Locations.
F18=Stock Inquiry
Displays the Stock Inquiry.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
224
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Manual Stock Movement
The Manual Stock Movement (WHM560) option is used to allow
manual entry of items actually moved within a warehouse.
Additionally, movements from an off site warehouse can be
processed as a movement to an intermediate receiving location
then to a normal location.
The initial screen displayed allows entry of the warehouse,
location, item and pallet. The location to which the movement
is to take place is also requested.
The second screen will display details of item(s) found and
allow entry of the quantity to be moved and the location to
receive the movement. Once the above details have been entered,
the movement documentation can be printed and the movement(s)
processed.
15/08/17 Page
225
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Enter Selection Criteria Panel - WHM560-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM560-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Manual Stock Movements USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* From
*
* Warehouse . . . __ +
*
* Location No. . . ______ +
*
* Item . . . . . . _______________ +
*
* UPI . . . . . . 0
*
*
*
* To Location . . ______ +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Enter Selection Criteria Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* Location No. (WINILM)
* Item (WINIIM)
* To Location (WINILM)
15/08/17 Page
226
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Enter Selection Criteria Panel
From Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Specify the warehouse
in which the movement is to take place. The entered warehouse
must exist on file. This field must be entered.
From Location No. (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Specify the location
from which the movement is to take place. The entered location
must exist on file. If location only is entered all pallets for
any item in this location will be displayed. If location and
item are entered all pallets for this item in this location
will be displayed. If location, item and pallet are entered
only the specified pallet containing the specified item is
displayed.
If the location is not entered, locations with the following
status codes will not be displayed, even if the location has
stock:
* E Empty
* G Being Filled
* T Temporary
* X Unusable
From Item (15,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Specify the item to be
moved. This item must exist on file.
From UPI (Unique Pallet Identifier) (6,0):
Specify the UPI from which the movement is to take place. The
entered pallet must exist on file.
NOTE: If you enter a UPI without a location, BPCS checks the
fields, and will respond as if no location was entered. If you
enter a UPI in a location with a status of E, G, T, or X, BPCS
will not continue to the next panel.
15/08/17 Page
227
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
To Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Specify the location to
receive the movement. This location must exist on file and must
be a palletized location type. If an entry is made here it
will be loaded as the default 'To' location for all lines
displayed on the subsequent list screen.
APROCESSING OPTIONS - Enter Selection Criteria Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
228
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Move Stock Panel - WHM560-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM560-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/18/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Manual Stock Movements SCHLAG
16:13:14*
*
*
* Warehouse . . : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
*
*
* From To
Interim*
* Loc UPI Item Lot Status Loc Quantity
Loc *
* MM0100 34 3004 MM0500 72.000
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Forward F8=Backward F11=Fold F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Move Stock Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
Displays the warehouse selected.
Description (30,A):
Displays the description of the warehouse selected.
15/08/17 Page
229
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
From Location (6,A):
Displays the from location for each pallet inventory record
matching the selection criteria.
Unique Pallet Identifier (UPI) (6,0):
Displays the UPI for each pallet inventory record matching the
selection criteria.
Item (15,A):
Displays the item number for each pallet inventory record
matching the selection criteria.
Description (12,A):
Displays the short form of the description of the item for each
pallet inventory record matching the selection criteria.
To Location (6,A):
Enter the location to which this item / pallet is to be moved.
If a 'to' location was specified on the initial selection
screen, this value will be defaulted here. This may be changed
if required. If a value is entered here, the quantity and the
intermediate location (if present) must also be entered.
Considerable validation is carried out against the specified
'to' location before the movement is allowed. For example :
The location must be able to accept the
item's pallet type.
The location must have enough space to
accept the movement.
The location is not a picking or
replenishment location for another item.
The location contains like items.
The location must have a valid location status. This means
that, if it is not a Main Storage location, the status must be
blank. If it is Main Storage, the type must be 'E' or 'G'. If
the status does not fit into these criteria, an override
15/08/17 Page
230
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
message is displayed, that, if executed, corrects the status.
Quantity (11,3):
Enter the quantity of the item to be moved. This quantity may
not be a negative amount and cannot be greater than the
available quantity held on the pallet inventory file. If a
value is entered here, the 'to' location and the intermediate
location (if present) must also be entered.
Interim Location (6,A):
The location specified here must be defined as either a
receiving or shipping type. The location specified here must
have one of the following location types:
* '6' Ship Location
* '7' Receiving Location
* '8' Loading Bay
Additionally, the location status must be blank. If it is not,
an override message is displayed, and if it is accepted, the
location status is set to blank.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Move Stock Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
231
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Inter-Warehouse Transfers
The Inter-Warehouse Transfers (WHM550) selection allows
movement of stock between two different warehouses or the same
warehouse. It allows stock to be "Picked" from one managed
warehouse, and "Putaway" to the other if requested. The
transfer program consists of three panels.
Select Warehouses Panel - WHM550-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM550-01 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/11/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Inter-Warehouse Transfers SCHLAG
16:35:32*
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* From Warehouse . . . . . __ +
*
* To Warehouse . . . . . . __ +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Select Warehouses Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
From/To Warehouse (WINIWM)
15/08/17 Page
232
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Select Warehouses Panel
From Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid warehouse
code to move stock from.
To Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid warehouse
code to move stock to.
Note that the to warehouse can be the same if necessary, but in
either case, at least one of the warehouses must be managed.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Warehouses Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
233
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Transfer Items Between Warehouse Panel - WHM550-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM550-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/18/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Inter-Warehouse Transfers SCHLAG
16:37:01*
*
*
* From Warehouse: WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY Movement No.:
411*
* To Warehouse: CH CHICAGO-P1 FACILITY
*
*
*
* Enter Transfers or Select Action: 1=Putaway 2=Pick 3=Pick & Putaway
*
* 4=Delete
*
* From To
*
* Act Item + UPI Lot + Quantity Locn +
Locn + *
* 3004 72.000 PA0301
QC0001 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
More... *
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Accept F7=Backward
F8=Forward *
* F12=Cancel F14=Putaway F15=Pick F16=Pick & Putaway
*
*
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Transfer Items Between Warehouses Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Item Number (WINIIM)
* Lot Number (WINIL1D)
* From/To Location (WINIL2D)
15/08/17 Page
234
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Transfer Items Between Warehouses Panel
From/To Warehouse (2,A):
The warehouse code to move stock from/to that was entered on
panel WHM550-01 is displayed, along with the description
associated with that warehouse.
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Item (15,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the item number
of the stock that is to be moved. If a UPI (Unique Pallet
Identifier) is entered, then this value must match that
associated with the UPI entered.
UPI (Unique Pallet Identifier) (9,0):
Enter the UPI (Unique Pallet Identifier) of the Pallet that is
to be moved (Optional). If just the UPI is entered, then the
item number, lot, quantity and from location will be picked up
from the Pallet Inventory file, and loaded to the display
automatically.
Lot (10,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the Lot Number of
the stock that is to be moved. If a UPI (Unique Pallet
Identifier) is entered, then this value must match that
associated with the UPI entered.
Quantity (11,3):
Enter the quantity that is to be moved (in stocking units). If
a UPI (Unique Pallet Identifier) is entered, then this value
must be available to be moved on the associated Pallet.
15/08/17 Page
235
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
From Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the location to
move the stock from in the From Warehouse. If a UPI (Unique
Pallet Identifier) is entered, then this value must match that
associated with the UPI entered.
To Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the location to
move the stock to in the To Warehouse. The location must have
a location status of blank, if it is not Main Storage. If it is
Main Storage, the location status must be 'E' or 'G'. If these
conditions do not exist, an override message is displayed. If
it is accepted, the location is set to the proper status before
update.
Available Actions - Transfer Items Between Warehouses Panel
1=Putaway
2=Pick
3=Pick & Putaway
4=Delete
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Transfer Items Between Warehouses Panel
F14=Putaway
This will do the equivalent of selecting action 1=Putaway
against every line on the panel that has data entered on it.
F15=Pick
This will do the equivalent of selecting action 2=Pick against
every line on the panel that has data entered on it.
15/08/17 Page
236
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F16=Pick & Putaway
This will do the equivalent of selecting action 3=Pick &
Putaway against every line on the panel that has data entered
on it.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
237
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Recommended Putaway Locations Panel - WHM550-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM550-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/11/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Inter-Warehouse Transfers SCHLAG
10:25:40*
*
*
* From Warehouse: WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY Movement No.:
411*
* To Warehouse: CH CHICAGO-P1 FACILITY
*
*
*
* Recommended Putaway Locations:
*
*
*
* From To
Failure *
* Item Description UPI Quantity Loc Loc
Status *
* 3004 FINISHED ITEM 72.000 PA0301 QC0001
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom *
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward
F12=Cancel *
*
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Recommended Putaway Locations Panel
From/To Warehouse (2,A):
The warehouse code to move stock from/to that was entered on
Panel WHM550-01 is displayed, along with the description
associated with that warehouse.
Item (15,A):
Shows the item number of the stock that is to be moved.
15/08/17 Page
238
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (30,A):
Shows the description of the item this was requested to be
moved.
UPI (Unique Pallet Identifier) (9,0):
If a picking option was selected, this shows the UPI of the
pallet that the system has recommended to be picked in order to
satisfy the move request. If a picking option was not selected,
this shows the UPI of the pallet manually selected to be moved.
Lot (10,A):
Shows the Lot Number of the stock that is to be moved.
Quantity (11,3):
Shows the quantity that is to be moved (in stocking units).
Note that if a large quantity was requested to be moved, then
the quantity will be split down into several lines, with a
maximum quantity on each line of a Pallet Quantity. Example: If
a Pallet quantity was set to be 50 units, and a request to move
120 units was made, then this single line might be split on
this panel into three lines of 50, 50 and 20.
From Location (6,A):
Shows the locations to move the stock from in the From
Warehouse. If a Pick option was selected, then this panel will
display the locations that it is recommended to pick this stock
to.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Recommended Putaway Locations Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
239
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Movement Confirmation
The Movement Confirmation (WHM520) selection allows
confirmation of any stock movement within a warehouse. This
includes "Putaway," "Manual Movements," "Inter-Warehouse
Transfers," and "Replenishments." The confirmation programs
consists of two panels.
Select Warehouse and Movement Panel - WHM520-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM520-01 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/09/93*
* Revise Movement Confirmation SCHLAG
15:53:20*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . __ +
*
* Movement Number . . . . . . . . _______ +
*
* Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . _______________
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F10=Revise F12=Cancel F21=Delete
F24=More Keys*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Select Warehouse and Movement Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* Movement Number (WINIW1D)
15/08/17 Page
240
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Select Warehouse and Movement Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid warehouse
code to confirm movements within.
Movement Number (7,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid movement
number containing all the movements that are to be confirmed.
This movement number is made up of two parts:
* Position 1 - A single character movement type code.
* "M" = Manual Movement
* "P" = Putaway
* "R" = Replenishment.
* "W" = Inter-Warehouse Transfer
Positions 2 to 7 - A six digit movement number, this must be
padded to the left with zeros.
* Example: "P000123"
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Warehouse and Movement Panel
F14=Stock Inquiry
Displays the Stock Inquiry Selection (WHM310-01) panel.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
241
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
15/08/17 Page
242
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Confirm Movement Panel - WHM520-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM520-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/11/93*
* Revise Movement Confirmation Inter-Warehous SCHLAG
15:54:12*
*
*
* Warehouse WD Movement Number: W000004
*
* Delivery Scheduling is not Active for this Warehouse.
*
* From To
*
* Item Lot St UPI Quantity Locn Chk
Locn Chk*
* 3001 9310000134 A 1 13.000 DEFREC
PA0000 *
* BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 8 Alt Seq:
*
* 3001 9310000134 A 2 256.000 DEFREC
PA0000 *
* BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 8 Alt Seq:
*
* 3001 9310000134 A 3 256.000 DEFREC
MM0000 *
* BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 8 Alt Seq:
*
* 3002 9310000135 A 4 24.000 DEFREC
PA0100 *
* BEEF2 STEW CANNED 12OZ 1 Alt Seq:
*
* 3002 9310000135 A 5 72.000 DEFREC
PA0100 *
* BEEF2 STEW CANNED 12OZ 1 Alt Seq:
*
* 3002 9310000135 A 6 72.000 DEFREC
MM0001 *
* BEEF2 STEW CANNED 12OZ 1 Alt Seq:
*
* 3002 9310000135 A 7 72.000 DEFREC
MM0001 *
* BEEF2 STEW CANNED 12OZ 1 Alt Seq:
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
Bottom*
* F14=Stock Inquiry
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Confirm Movement Panel
Item (15,A):
Each item number within this movement is displayed.
Lot (10,A):
The Lot Number with which each item within this movement is
associated is displayed. This indicates the lot to which each
item originally belonged.
15/08/17 Page
243
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Description (11,A):
The description associated with each item number is displayed.
UPI (Unique Pallet Identifier) (9,0):
The UPI (Unique Pallet Identifier) associated with each item
within this movement is displayed.
Quantity (Number of Pick Units) (11,3):
The quantity of this item that is to be moved is displayed. The
quantity is displayed in picking units, not in any other
storage unit of measure.
From Location (6,A):
The location within this warehouse in which this item currently
resides is displayed.
Chk (From Location Check Digits) (2,A):
The check digit is additional check, that the correct location
has been entered to confirm the movement of this item. It is
calculated by the program entered in WHM110 in the Check Digit
Algorithm field. The default program is WHM522. It calculates
the digit using a Modulus 23 calculation. This field is only
displayed if the warehouse confirmation for the selected
movement type is set to '2' for the From Warehouse.
To Location (6,A):
The To Location defaults to the location that was selected at
entry by the user. It may be changed to any other valid
location in the To Warehouse for the item. The location must
have a status of blank if it is not a Main Storage Location, or
'E' or 'G' if it is Main Storage. If the location status is not
valid, an override message is displayed. If accepted the status
is set appropriately and the update is completed.
15/08/17 Page
244
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Chk (To Location Check Digits) (2,A):
The check digit is additional check, that the correct location
has been entered to confirm the movement of this item. It is
calculated by the program entered in WHM110 in the Check Digit
Algorithm field. The default program is WHM522. It calculates
the digit using a Modulus 23 calculation. This field is only
displayed if the warehouse confirmation for the selected
movement type is set to '2' for the To Warehouse.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Confirm Movement Panel
F14=Stock Inquiry
Displays the Stock Inquiry Selection (WHM310-01) panel.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
245
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Order Picking
The Picking selection (WHM530) allows order picking to be
processed for the Warehouse Management System. If Picking is by
route, then a routing screen will be displayed, allowing the
user to adjust routes or the individual order lines on a route.
If picking by route is not available, then the user can request
either a list of order lines or order headers. The user can
then Pick the orders that they wish to move to ship. They can
also merge smaller orders into a larger consolidated load. Load
numbers will be created for all orders sent to the same ship
location.
The program records the selection made on the Pick LOAD file
(IPL).This holds all the information for a pick list, and is
used to drive the Pick List Print and Pick Confirmation
programs.
15/08/17 Page
246
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Order Picking - Selection Criteria Panel - WHM530-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM530-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Order Picking - Selection Criteria USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse (required) . . . . __ +
*
*
*
* From Route . . . . . . . . . ______ To ______
*
* From Carrier . . . . . . . . ______ To ______
*
* From Request Date. . . . . . 1/01/01 To 10/20/93
*
* From Customer No . . . . . . ______ + To ______ +
*
* From Ship-To No. . . . . . . ____ + To ____ +
*
* From Picking Select Code . . _ + To _ +
*
* From Zone . . . . . . . . . ___ To ___
*
* From Pick Area . . . . . . . 0 (0=All, 1=Pick, 2=Main)
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Pick Print Run Parameter . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
* ENTER=Display by Line F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
* F14=Display by Order F15=Open Order Inquiry
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Order Picking Selection Criteria Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* From/To Customer No (WINRCM)
* From/To Ship-To No (WINEST)
* From/To Picking Select Code (WINIPSD)
15/08/17 Page
247
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Field Descriptions - Order Picking Selection Criteria Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid warehouse
that picking is to take place within.
From/To Route (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the lower and upper
routes, carriers, request dates, customer numbers, ship-tos,
picking select codes, and zones to designate the range of
orders eligible for release for pick slip printing and
lot/location allocation. Extreme values by default.
From/To Carrier (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the lower and upper
routes, carriers, request dates, customer numbers, ship-tos,
picking select codes, and zones to designate the range of
orders eligible for release for pick slip printing and
lot/location allocation. Extreme values by default.
From/To Request Date (6,0):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the lower and upper
routes, carriers, request dates, customer numbers, ship-tos,
picking select codes, and zones to designate the range of
orders eligible for release for pick slip printing and
lot/location allocation. Extreme values by default.
From/To Customer Number (6,0):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the lower and upper
routes, carriers, request dates, customer numbers, ship-tos,
picking select codes, and zones to designate the range of
orders eligible for release for pick slip printing and
lot/location allocation. Extreme values by default.
From/To Ship-To Number (4,0):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the lower and upper
15/08/17 Page
248
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
routes, carriers, request dates, customer numbers, ship-tos,
picking select codes, and zones to designate the range of
orders eligible for release for pick slip printing and
lot/location allocation. Extreme values by default.
From/To Picking Select Code (1,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the lower and upper
routes, carriers, request dates, customer numbers, ship-tos,
picking select codes, and zones to designate the range of
orders eligible for release for pick slip printing and
lot/location allocation. Extreme values by default.
From/To Zone (3,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the lower and upper
routes, carriers, request dates, customer numbers, ship-tos,
picking select codes, and zones to designate the range of
orders eligible for release for pick slip printing and
lot/location allocation. Extreme values by default.
From Pick Area (1,A):
Enter 0 to pick from all locations. Enter 1 to pick from
Picking locations only. Enter 2 to pick from Main storage
locations only.
Pick Print Run Parameter (1,A):
Enter 0 to process the pick list interactively. Enter 1 to
print the pick list in batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Order Picking Selection Criteria Panel
Enter=Display by Line
causes the program to check whether Picking by Route is
available. If so, then processing will advance to the second
panel (WHM530-02), and display a list of routes that match the
entered selection criteria. If Picking by Route is not
available, then the program will advance to the third panel
15/08/17 Page
249
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
(WHM530-03) instead, and display a list of orders that match
the entered selection criteria.
F14=Display by Order
This causes processing to advance to the third panel
(WHM530-03) instead of to the second panel (WHM530-02), which
is the default when Enter is pressed (see above).
F15=Open Orders Inquiry
Displays the Open Orders Inquiry Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
250
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Order Picking - Order Summary Panel - WHM530-02
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM530-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/YY*
* CPU Order Picking - Selection Criteria USER
HH:MM:SS
*Warehouse: WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Pk Pk Frm Route Carr. Customer Ship-to Req. Date Zone Weight
.00 *
* 0 1/01/01 Vol.
.00 *
* 10/14/93 Units
.00 *
* Ship Location
WDSHIP *
* Type actions and press ENTER. 11=Pick 12=Adjust 13=Unpick
*
* Act Date Order Number Quantity Weight Vol/Un
Status *
* __ 10/14/93 800720 433.00 .00 .00
*
* __ 10/14/93 800722 240.00 .00 .00
*
* __ 9/22/93 800723 40.00 .00 .00
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F12=Cancel F14=Release All
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Order Picking -- Order Summary Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Date (6,0):
Order request date.
15/08/17 Page
251
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Order Number (6,0):
Displays the order number.
Quantity (9,2):
Order request quantity.
Weight (9,2):
Weight of routes orders.
Volume (9,2):
Volume of routes orders.
Status (3,A):
Route status, PIK=Picked, PPK=Partially picked.
Available Actions - Order Picking - Order Summary Panel
11=Pick
12=Adjust
13=Unpick
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Order Picking - Order Summary Panel
F14=Select All
Selects all Routes/Orders for picking.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
252
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Order Picking - Order Detail Panel - WHM530-03
Select records by entering the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. You can specify an
action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
253
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM530-03 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/YY*
* CPU Order Picking - Order Detail USER
HH:MM:SS*
*
*
* Warehouse: WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Pk Pk Frm Route Carr. Customer Ship-to Req. Date Zone Weight
.00*
* 0 1/01/01 Volume
.00*
* 10/20/93 Units
.00*
* Ship Location
WDSHIP *
* Type actions and press ENTER. 11=Pick 12=Allocate 13=Unpick
*
* Act Order Lin Cust Item Order Qty Pick Qty Picked
Sts*
* __ 800720 1 308100 3001 48.000 48.000
.000 *
* __ 800720 2 308100 3002 200.000 200.000
.000 *
* __ 800720 3 308100 3003 185.000 185.000
.000 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F11=Fold F12=Cancel F14=Release All
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Field Descriptions - Order Picking - Order Detail Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
The warehouse entered on the first panel (WHM530-01) is
displayed, along with its description.
Consolidation Number (6,0):
Displayed for reference.
From/To Route (6,A):
Displayed for reference.
15/08/17 Page
254
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
From/To Carrier (6,A):
Displayed for reference.
From/To Customer Number (6,0):
Displayed for reference.
From/To Ship-To Number (4,0):
Displayed for reference.
From/To Request Date (6,0):
Displayed for reference.
From/To Zone (3,A):
Displayed for reference.
Weight (9,2):
Cumulative total of weight of orders picked.
Volume (9,2):
Cumulative total of volume of orders picked.
Units (9,2):
Cumulative total of number of units picked.
Ship Location (6,A):
Displayed for reference.
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
15/08/17 Page
255
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Order (6,0):
The number of the order.
Lin (3,0):
The order line number.
Cust (6,0):
The customer who ordered the item
Item (15,A):
The item ordered.
Order Qty (11,3):
Order request quantity.
Pick Qty (11,3):
The quantity requested to be picked.
Picked (11,3):
The quantity actually picked.
Status (3,A):
Pick status, PIK=Picked, PPK=Partially picked.
Available Actions - Order Picking - Order Detail Panel
11=Pick
12=Allocate
13=Unpick
15/08/17 Page
256
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Order Picking - Order Detail Panel
F14=Release All
Select all orders for picking.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
257
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Manual Replenishments
The Manual Replenishments (WHM570) program allows the manual
activation of the replenishment process, overriding automatic
replenishment. Manual replenishment requests the entry of
warehouse and item or warehouse and location. Upon ending this
program, the movement tickets print and inventory updates are
invoked if a valid replenishment request was made. The same
location cannot be replenished more than once for each time
this function is used.
15/08/17 Page
258
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM570-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Manual Replenishments USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*Type Selections, Press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse (Required) . . __ +
*
*
*
* Replenish Location . . . ______ +
*
*OR
*
* Replenish Item . . . . . _______________ +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Replenish Locations or Items Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* Replenish Location (WINILM)
* Replenish Item (WINIIM)
Field Descriptions - Replenish Locations or Items Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid warehouse
code for replenishment request. This warehouse must exist on
15/08/17 Page
259
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
file.
Warehouse Description (30,A):
The description of the selected warehouse is displayed.
Replenish Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) This entry is optional
(replenish location OR item must be entered). Enter the name of
the location for which manual replenishment is to take place.
The specified location must be on the Item/Warehouse record as
either a Picking or a Replenishment location. The location
status must be blank. If it is not blank, an override message
is displayed. The override must be accepted, which will set the
location status to blank, before the transaction can be
accepted.
Replenish Item (15,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) This entry is optional
(replenish location OR item must be entered). Enter the name of
the item to be replenished. The specified item must exist on
file and be have a picking location defined for it.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Replenish Locations or Items Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
260
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Load Status Summary Report
The Load Status Summary Report (WHM210) selection allows entry
of the parameters required for a report run. The resulting
report contains details relating to each load matching the
selected values. Details included in the report for each load
are ship date, load status, carrier and route.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM210D-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Load Status Summary Report USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . __ + (Blank for all)
*
*
*
* Ship Date . . . . . . 0/00/00 To 12/31/99
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*Run Time Parameter. . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Load Status Summary Report Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Warehouse (WINIWM)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Load Status Summary Report Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
Enter a valid warehouse code for report. If this selection is
left blank, then all loads that match the other selection
criteria will be included, regardless of their associated
warehouse.
15/08/17 Page
261
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
From/To Ship Date (6,0):
Enter the earliest (from) and latest (to) ship dates for loads
to be included in the report. The From Ship Date may not be
greater than the To Ship Date.
From/To Ship Date (6,0):
Enter the earliest (from) and latest (to) ship dates for loads
to be included in the report. The From Ship Date may not be
greater than the To Ship Date.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Load Status Summary Report Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
262
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Pick Confirm
Pick Confirm (WHM540) allows you to confirm pick lists
requested using Pick Select/Print. The stock is confirmed as
having been moved to the shipping location. Quantities may be
decreased, but not increased. Lot numbers may also be amended.
Select Warehouse and Pick List Panel - WHM540-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM540-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Pick List Confirmation USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse _____ +
*
* Pick List No. _____ + ___
*
* Comment ______________
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Stock Inquiry
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Select Warehouse and Pick List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
15/08/17 Page
263
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
* Pick List No. (WINIPPD)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Select Warehouse and Pick List Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid warehouse
that picking is to take place within.
Pick List Number (6,0):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the Pick list
number that is to be confirmed.
Pick List Suffix (3,0):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the Pick list
number that is to be confirmed.
Comment (15,A):
Enter a comment if required. This is written to the Inventory
Transaction History file.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Warehouse and Pick List Panel
F13=Stock Inquiry
Display the Stock Inquiry panel.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
264
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Confirm Pick List Panel - WHM540-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM540-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/09/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Pick List Confirmation SCHLAG
9:30:38*
*
*
* Warehouse : WD Pick List No. : 4 Pick Suffix : 1
*
* Item/ From To
*
* Description Lot Sts UPI Quantity Loc Chk Loc
Chk*
* 3004 33 72.000 MM0000
WDSHIP *
* 3004 36.000 PA0301
WDSHIP *
* 3004 32 72.000 MM0000
WDSHIP *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F11=Fold
F12=Cancel *
* F13=Stock Inquiry F15=Move Confirm
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Confirm Pick List Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
The warehouse entered on the first panel (WHM540-01) is
displayed, along with its description.
Pick List Number (6,0):
The pick list number selected for confirmation is displayed.
15/08/17 Page
265
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Pick List Suffix (3,0):
The suffix selected for confirmation is displayed.
Quantity (11,3):
Enter the quantity moved from the picking location to the
shipping location.
From Location (6,A):
The From Location defaults to the location that was selected at
entry by the user. It may be changed to any other valid
location in the From Warehouse for the item. The location must
have a status of blank if it is not a Main Storage Location, or
'E' or 'G' if it is Main Storage. If the location status is not
valid, an override message is displayed. If accepted the status
is set appropriately and the update is completed.
Check Digit (2,0):
The check digit is additional check, that the correct location
has been entered to confirm the movement of this item. It is
calculated by the program entered in WHM110 in the Check Digit
Algorithm field. The default program is WHM522. It calculates
the digit using a Modulus 23 calculation. This field is only
displayed if the warehouse confirmation for the selected
movement type is set to '2' for the From Warehouse.
To Location (6,A):
The To Location defaults to the location that was selected at
entry by the user. It may be changed to any other valid
location in the To Warehouse for the item. The location must
have a status of blank if it is not a Main Storage Location, or
'E' or 'G' if it is Main Storage. If the location status is not
valid, an override message is displayed. If accepted the status
is set appropriately and the update is completed.
15/08/17 Page
266
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Check Digit (2,A):
The check digit is additional check, that the correct location
has been entered to confirm the movement of this item. It is
calculated by the program entered in WHM110 in the Check Digit
Algorithm field. The default program is WHM522. It calculates
the digit using a Modulus 23 calculation. This field is only
displayed if the warehouse confirmation for the selected
movement type is set to '2' for the To Warehouse.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Confirm Pick List Panel
F13=Stock Inquiry
Display the Stock Inquiry panel.
F15=Move Confirm
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
267
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Ship Confirm
After releasing and printing of picking documents, the
warehouse performs routine pulling of inventory. This process
often involves some changes which must be reflected on the
released customer orders and in the updating of inventory
status with the appropriate quantity, location and lot for the
successfully processed picking documents.
Ship Confirm (ORD570) allows you to confirm the actual quantity
(and lot/location) of inventory shipped, as opposed to the
quantity picked, as close to the physical movement of inventory
as possible.
15/08/17 Page
268
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Ship Confirm Selection Panel - ORD570-01
Use ORD570-01 to select picked orders or order lines available
for confirmation.
*************************************************************************
*******
* ORD570-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Pick Confirmation USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse __ +
*
*
*
* AND/OR
*
*
*
* Consolidation Number _____ +
*
* OR
*
* From Route ______ To ______
*
* From Carrier ______ To ______
*
* From Request Date 1/01/01 To 12/31/99
*
* From Customer Number ______ To ______
*
* From Ship-To Number To
*
* OR
*
* Load Number ______ +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Enter=Confirm by Line F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
* F14=Confirm by Order F16=Open Order Inquiry
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Ship Confirm Selection Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* Consolidation Number (WINECD)
* Load Number (WINIPLD)
15/08/17 Page
269
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Ship Confirm Selection Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the code of the
warehouse from which orders are to be selected (at the line
item level).
Consolidation Number (6,0):
(Press F4 for prompt.) Key a consolidation number if you want
to maintain or print shipping documents for orders or order
lines associated with that consolidation number.
From/To Route (6,A):
To limit your selections to a route or range of routes, key the
lower and upper route numbers.
From/To Carrier (6,A):
To limit your selections to a carrier or range of carriers, key
the lower and upper carrier numbers.
From/To Request Date (6,0):
To limit your selections to a specific request date or range of
request dates, key the lower and upper request dates.
From/To Customer Number (6,0):
To limit your selections to a customer number or range of
customers, key the lower and upper customer numbers.
From/To Ship-To Number (4,0):
To limit your selections to a customer ship-to or range of
ship-to's, key the lower and upper ship-to numbers. You must
specify a customer number if you enter a ship-to.
15/08/17 Page
270
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Load Number (6,0):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key a Load Number to
perform ship processing for orders with that load number,
reference the pick list for Load numbers, or use the prompt
window.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Ship Confirm Selection Panel
F14=Confirm by Order
Displays the Pick Confirmation by Order panel (ORD57003).
F16=Open Order Inquiry
Displays the Open Order Inquiry Panel (ORD30001).
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
271
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Ship Confirm by Line Panel - ORD570-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* ORD570-02 *Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/09/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Ship Confirm by Line SCHLAG
12:13:11*
*
*
* Warehouse Consol Route Carrier Customer Ship-To Request Pallets
.01*
* WD 0 0 0 1/01/01 Weight
37.44*
* 999999 999999 999999 9999 12/31/99 Volume
4.68*
* Type actions and press Enter. 11=Select 13=De-Select
*
*
*
* Act Order Cust Request Line Item Number Order Qty Conf Qty
Drp Sts*
* __ 800733 308100 10/14/93 1 3004 72.000 72.000 N
*CONF*
* __ 800733 308100 10/14/93 2 3004 72.000 72.000 N
*CONF*
* __ 800733 308100 10/14/93 3 3004 144.000 144.000 N
*CONF*
* __ 800734 308100 10/14/93 1 3004 72.000 72.000 N
*CONF*
* __ 800734 308100 10/14/93 2 3004 36.000 36.000 N
*CONF*
* __ 800734 308100 10/14/93 3 3004 72.000 72.000 N
*CONF*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward F11=Fold
F12=Cancel *
* F14=Select All F15=Accept w/Consol F16=Open Order Inquiry F24=More
Keys *
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Ship Confirm by Line Panel
Header Information fields:
BPCS displays the warehouse code, consolidation number, and
route, carrier, customer, ship-to and request date ranges you
selected on panel ORD570-01.
15/08/17 Page
272
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Act (Action) (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Order (6,0):
Displays the order number for each line.
Customer (6,0):
Displays the customer number for each line.
Request (6,0):
Displays the request date for each line.
Line (3,0):
Displays the line number for each line.
Item Number (15,A):
Displays the item number for each line.
Order Balance (11,3):
Remaining order quantity for this item and order line.
Conf. Qty (11,3):
The pick confirmed quantity is the default ship confirmation
quantity. The ship confirmed quantity must either equal the
pick confirmed quantity or 0.
The confirmation quantity cannot be changed after the line has
been selected. However, the confirmed line may be de-selected,
then changed.
15/08/17 Page
273
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Drp (Drop code) (1,A):
This code is not used in a managed warehouse since the ship
confirmed quantity must be 0 or the pick confirmed quantity. If
0 quantity is ship confirmed, the line returns to "entered"
status.
Sts (Status) (5,A):
BPCS displays the status of the order line. Valid status codes
are *PICK (picked) and *CONF (confirmed).
If you press F11 to fold panel ORD570-02, BPCS displays the
weight, volume, pallets and shipping priority fields for each
order or order line. These fields are not input-capable.
ADDITIONAL FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Ship Confirm by Line Panel
Weight (9,2):
Total weight for this order line. Weight is calculated as the
weight specified for this item in Item Master Maintenance
(INV100) times the confirmed quantity.
Volume (9,2):
Total volume for this order line. Volume is calculated as the
volume specified for this item in Item Master Maintenance
(INV100) times the confirmed quantity.
Pallet (9,2):
Number of pallets for this order line. Pallets are calculated
based on the units per pallet specified for this item in Item
Master Maintenance (INV100) times the confirmed quantity.
Priority (2,0):
Shipping priority for this customer order line, from 99 (high)
to 01 (low).
15/08/17 Page
274
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Ship Confirm by Line Panel
F14=Select All
Selects all orders which qualify for the ranges displayed at
the top of the panel and which are in *PICK status.
F15=Accept w/Consol
Accepts selections with consolidation. BPCS automatically
assigns the next available consolidation number.
F16=Open Order Inquiry
Displays the Open Order Inquiry panel (ORD300-01).
F17=Accept Selections/Ship
Accepts selections and goes to Shipping Maintenance/Print panel
(ORD590).
F18=Accept w/Consol/Ship
Accepts selections with consolidation and goes to Shipping
Maintenance/Print panel (ORD590).
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
275
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Ship Confirmation by Order Panel - ORD570-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* ORD570-03 *Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/11/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Ship Confirmation by Order SCHLAG
12:26:14*
*
*
* Warehouse Consol Route Carrier Customer Ship-To Request Pallets
.01*
* WD 0 0 0 1/01/01 Weight
37.44*
* 999999 999999 999999 9999 12/31/99 Volume
4.68*
* Type actions and press Enter. 11=Select 13=De-Select
*
*
*
* Act Order Cust. Ship-To Request Lines Order Qty Conf. Qty
Status*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward F11=Fold
F12=Cancel *
* F14=Select All F15=Accept w/Consol F16=Open Order Inquiry F24=More
Keys *
* No records found.
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Ship Confirmation by Order Panel
Header Information fields:
BPCS displays the warehouse code, consolidation number, and
route, carrier, customer, ship-to and request date ranges you
selected on panel ORD570-01.
15/08/17 Page
276
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Act (Action code) (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Order (6,0):
Displays the order number for each line.
Customer (6,0):
Displays the customer number for each line.
Ship-To (4,0):
Displays the ship-to number for each line.
Request (6,0):
Displays the request date for each line.
Lines (3,0):
Number of order lines available for confirmation. Any
additional order lines which have not yet been processed remain
unpicked or unallocated.
Order Qty (11,3):
Remaining order quantity for this order.
Conf. Qty (11,3):
The confirmation quantity equals the pick confirmed quantity
for all order
lines in *PICK status for this order.
Status (5,A):
BPCS displays the status of the order. Valid status codes are
15/08/17 Page
277
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*PICK(picked) and *CONF (confirmed).
If you press F11 to fold panel ORD570-03, BPCS displays the
weight,volume and pallet fields for that line. They are not
input-capable.
ADDITIONAL FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Ship Confirmation by Order
Panel
Weight (9,2):
Total weight for this order. Weight is calculated as the weight
specified for all items picked or confirmed for this order, as
defined in Item Master Maintenance (INV100), times the
remaining order quantity for each item.
Volume (9,2):
Total volume for this order. Volume is calculated as the volume
specified for all items picked or confirmed for this order, as
defined in Item Master Maintenance (INV100), times the
remaining order quantity for each item.
Pallet (9,2):
Number of pallets for this order line. Pallets are calculated
based on the units per pallet specified for this item in Item
Master Maintenance (INV100) times the confirmed quantity.
Available Actions - Ship Confirmation by Order Panel
11=Select
Selects an order line for confirmation. BPCS adds the weight
and volume of this order line to the Weight and Volume totals
displayed at the top of the panel. The order line status is
changed from *PICK (picked) to *CONF (confirmed).
13=De-Select
De-selects a selected order line. BPCS returns the order line
15/08/17 Page
278
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
status to *PICK and decrements the Weight and Volume fields at
the top of the panel.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Ship Confirmation by Order Panel
F14=Select All
Selects all orders which qualify for the ranges displayed at
the top of the panel and which are in *PICK status.
F15=Accept w/Consol
Accepts selections with consolidation. BPCS automatically
assigns the next available consolidation number.
F16=Open Order Inquiry
Displays the Open Order Inquiry panel (ORD300-01).
F17=Accept Selections/Ship
Accepts selections and goes to Shipping Maintenance/Print panel
(ORD590).
F18=Accept w/Consol/Ship
Accepts selections with consolidation and goes to Shipping
Maintenance/Print panel (ORD590).
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
279
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Shipping Document Print
The Shipping Document Print program (ORD590) allows you to
print shipping documents, including packing lists and bills of
lading. Only orders in *CONF status (those with open billing
lines) are available for printing.
ACCESS: Warehouse Management Menu (WHM)
15/08/17 Page
280
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Shipping Maintenance Panel - ORD590-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* ORD590-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Shipping Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . . . . +
*
*
*
* AND/OR
*
*
*
* Consolidation Number . . . +
*
* OR
*
* From Route . . . . . . . . To
*
* From Carrier . . . . . . . To
*
* From Request Date . . . . . 1/01/01 To 12/31/99
*
* From Customer Number . . . To
*
* From Ship-To Number . . . . To
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Enter=Select by Line F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
* F14=Select by Order
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Shipping Maintenance Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Warehouse (WINIWM)
Consolidation Number (WINECD)
15/08/17 Page
281
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Shipping Maintenance Panel
Warehouse (Press F4 for prompt) (2,A):
Key the code of the warehouse for which shipping documents are
to be maintained or printed (at the line item level).
Consolidation Number (6,0):
(Press F4 for prompt.) Key a consolidation number if you want
to maintain or print shipping documents for orders or order
lines associated with that consolidation number.
From/To Route (6,A):
To limit your selections to a route or range of routes, key the
lower and upper route numbers.
From/To Carrier (6,A):
To limit your selections to a carrier or range of carriers, key
the lower and upper carrier numbers.
From/To Request Date (6,0):
To limit your selections to a specific request date or range of
request dates, key the lower and upper request dates.
From/To Customer Number (6,0):
To limit your selections to a customer number or range of
customers, key the lower and upper customer numbers.
From/To Ship-To Number (4,0):
To limit your selections to a customer ship-to or range of
ship-to's, key the lower and upper ship-to numbers. You must
specify a customer number if you enter a ship-to.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Shipping Maintenance Panel
15/08/17 Page
282
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F14=Select by Order
Selects by order. BPCS displays panel ORD590-03.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
283
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Shipping Maintenance By Line Panel - ORD590-02
This panel is used to select order lines to be printed on the
packing list.
*************************************************************************
*******
* ORD590-02 * Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 * PC2047S1
10/22/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Shipping Maintenance SCHLAG
16:26:07*
*
*
* Warehouse Consol Route Carrier Customer Ship-To Request Weight
.00 *
* WD 0 0 0 1/01/01 Volume
.00 *
* 999999 999999 999999 9999 12/31/99 Pallets
.00 *
* Type actions and press Enter. 11=Select 13=De-Select
*
*
*
* Act Order Cust. Request Line Item Number Ship Qty Carton Numbers
Sts*
* 800733 308100 10/14/93 1 3004 72.000
*CONF*
* 800733 308100 10/14/93 2 3004 72.000
*CONF*
* 800733 308100 10/14/93 3 3004 144.000
*CONF*
* 800734 308100 10/14/93 1 3004 72.000
*CONF*
* 800734 308100 10/14/93 2 3004 36.000
*CONF*
* 800734 308100 10/14/93 3 3004 72.000
*CONF*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom *
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward F11=Fold
F12=Cancel *
* F14=Select All F15=Accept w/Consol
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Ship Confirmation By Line Panel
Header Information fields:
BPCS displays the warehouse code, consolidation number, and
route, carrier, customer, ship-to and request date ranges you
selected on panel ORD590-01.
15/08/17 Page
284
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Act (Action code) (2,A):
Key one of the following action codes:
* 11 (default) to select an order line for
shipping. BPCS adds the weight and volume of this order line
to the Weight and Volume totals displayed at the top of the
panel. The order line status is changed from *CONF (confirmed)
to *SHIP (in shipping).
* 13 to de-select a selected order line. BPCS
returns the order line status to *CONF and decrements the
Weight and Volume fields at the top of the panel.
Order (6,0):
BPCS displays the order number, customer number, request date,
order line number, item number and quantity remaining to be
shipped for each line.
Customer (6,0):
BPCS displays the order number, customer number, request date,
order line number, item number and quantity remaining to be
shipped for each line.
Request (6,0):
BPCS displays the order number, customer number, request date,
order line number, item number and quantity remaining to be
shipped for each line.
Line (3,0):
BPCS displays the order number, customer number, request date,
order line number, item number and quantity remaining to be
shipped for each line.
15/08/17 Page
285
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Item Number (15,A):
BPCS displays the order number, customer number, request date,
order line number, item number and quantity remaining to be
shipped for each line.
Ship Qty (9,2):
BPCS displays the order number, customer number, request date,
order line number, item number and quantity remaining to be
shipped for each line.
Carton Numbers (16,A):
Key the carton numbers for this shipment.
Sts (Status) (5,A):
BPCS displays the status of the order line. Valid status codes
are *CONF (confirmed) and *SHIP (shipped).
NOTE: If you press <F11> to fold panel ORD590-02, BPCS displays
additional weight, volume and pallet fields. They are not
input-capable.
ADDITIONAL FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Ship Confirmation By Line Panel
(Folded)
Weight (9,2):
Total weight for this order line. Weight is calculated as the
weight specified for this item in Item Master Maintenance
(INV100) times the confirmed quantity.
Volume (9,2):
Total volume for this order line. Volume is calculated as the
volume specified for this item in Item Master Maintenance
(INV100) times the confirmed quantity.
15/08/17 Page
286
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Pallet (9,2):
Number of pallets for this order line. Pallets are calculated
based on the units per pallet specified for this item in Item
Master Maintenance (INV100) times the confirmed quantity.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Ship Confirmation By Line Panel
F6=Accept
Accepts selections. Order lines selected for confirmation are
confirmed. BPCS returns to panel ORD590-01.
F14=Select All
Selects all order lines which qualify for the ranges displayed
at the top of the panel and which are in *CONF status.
F15=Accept w/ Consol
Accepts selections with consolidation. BPCS automatically
assigns the next available consolidation number.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
287
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Ship Maintenance By Order Panel - ORD590-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* ORD590-03 * Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 * PC2047S1
10/22/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Shipping Maintenance by Order SCHLAG
16:31:26*
*
*
* Warehouse Consol Route Carrier Customer Ship-To Request Weight
.00 *
* WD 0 0 0 1/01/01 Volume
.00 *
* 999999 999999 999999 9999 12/31/99 Pallets
.00 *
* Type actions and press Enter. 11=Select 13=De-Select
*
*
*
* Act Order Cust. Ship-To Request Lines Ship Qty Carton Numbers
Sts*
* 800733 308100 10/14/93 3 288.000
*CONF*
* 800734 308100 10/14/93 3 180.000
*CONF*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom *
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward F11=Fold
F12=Cancel *
* F14=Select All F15=Accept w/Consol
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Ship Maintenance By Order Panel
Act (Action code) (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Order (6,0):
Displays the order number for each line.
15/08/17 Page
288
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Customer (6,0):
Displays the customer number for each line.
Ship-To (4,0):
Displays the ship-to number for each line.
Request (6,0):
Displays the request date for each line.
Lines (3,0):
Number of order lines available for confirmation. Any
additional order lines which have not yet been processed remain
unpicked or unallocated.
Ship Qty (9,2):
BPCS displays the order number, customer number, request date,
order line number, item number and quantity remaining to be
shipped for each line.
Carton Numbers (16,A):
Key the carton numbers for this shipment.
Sts (Status) (5,A):
BPCS displays the status of the order line. Valid status codes
are *CONF (confirmed) and *SHIP (shipped).
Weight (9,2):
Total weight for this order.
Volume (9,2):
Total volume for this order.
15/08/17 Page
289
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Pallets (9,2):
Total pallets for this order.
NOTE: The weight and volume fields are expressed in "units of
weight." There is no conversion for the weights of order lines
whose items are defined in different weight units.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Ship Maintenance By Order Panel
F6=Accept
Accepts selections. Order lines selected for confirmation are
confirmed. BPCS returns to panel ORD590-01.
F14=Select All
Selects all orders which qualify for the ranges displayed at
the top of the panel and which are in *PICK status.
F15=Accept w/Consol
Accepts selections with consolidation. BPCS automatically
assigns the next available consolidation number.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
290
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Shipping Data Maintenance Panel - ORD590-04
*************************************************************************
*******
* ORD590-04 * Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 * PC2047S1
10/22/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Shipping Data Maintenance SCHLAG
16:28:32*
*
*
* Document Number 1993-1022 Shipment Date . . . .
10/22/93 *
* Shipper Number 1 + Carrier Number . . . 2
+ *
* Name . . . . . JTS FREIGHT SERVICE AIRBORNE EXPRESS
*
* Address 1 . . . 15900 SOUTH HALSTED STREET 10700 WAVELAND
*
* Address 2 . . .
*
* Address 3 . . . HARVEY FRANKLIN PARK
*
* Ste/Post/Country IL 60604 USA IL 60344 USA
*
* Consignee . . . + 0 (0,1) Intermediate Consignee
+*
* Name . . . . .
*
* Address 1 . . .
*
* Address 2 . . .
*
* Address 3 . . .
*
* Ste/Post/Country
*
* Exporter EIN No. Vehicle ID Number . .
*
* Point of Origin Route . . . . . . . .
*
* Loading Pier Ship Mode . . . . . .
*
* Port of Export Export Date . . . . .
10/22/93 *
* Port of Unload
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F14=Shipping Charges
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows -Shipping Data Maintenance Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Shipper Number (WINETP)
* Carrier Number (WINETP)
* Consignee Number (WINETP)
* Intermediate Consignee Number (WINETP)
NOTE: You must press <FIELD EXIT> when entering data in numeric
15/08/17 Page
291
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
fields.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Shipping Data Maintenance Panel
Document Number (10,A):
Key the document number for this shipment.
Shipment Date (6,0):
Key the shipment date. This field defaults to the current date.
Shipper Number (6,A):
(Press F4 for prompt) If you select a shipper number, BPCS
returns that shipper's address information as defined in
Trading Partner Maintenance (ORD105).
Carrier Number (6,A):
(Press F4 for prompt) If you select a carrier number, BPCS
returns that carrier's address information as defined in
Trading Partner Maintenance (ORD105).
(Shipper) Name (30,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
shipper specified in the Shipper Number field. If you did not
enter a shipper number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired shipper name and address information.
Address 1 (30,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
shipper specified in the Shipper Number field. If you did not
enter a shipper number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired shipper name and address information.
Address 2 (30,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
15/08/17 Page
292
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
shipper specified in the Shipper Number field. If you did not
enter a shipper number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired shipper name and address information.
Address 3 (30,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
shipper specified in the Shipper Number field. If you did not
enter a shipper number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired shipper name and address information.
State (3,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
shipper specified in the Shipper Number field. If you did not
enter a shipper number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired shipper name and address information.
Postal Code (9,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
shipper specified in the Shipper Number field. If you did not
enter a shipper number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired shipper name and address information.
Country (4,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
shipper specified in the Shipper Number field. If you did not
enter a shipper number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired shipper name and address information.
(Carrier) Name (30,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
carrier specified in the Carrier Number field. If you did not
enter a carrier number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired carrier name and address information.
15/08/17 Page
293
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Address 1 (30,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
carrier specified in the Carrier Number field. If you did not
enter a carrier number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired carrier name and address information.
Address 2 (30,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
carrier specified in the Carrier Number field. If you did not
enter a carrier number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired carrier name and address information.
Address 3 (30,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
carrier specified in the Carrier Number field. If you did not
enter a carrier number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired carrier name and address information.
State (3,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
carrier specified in the Carrier Number field. If you did not
enter a carrier number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired carrier name and address information.
Postal Code (9,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
carrier specified in the Carrier Number field. If you did not
enter a carrier number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired carrier name and address information.
Country (4,A):
These fields default from the address information for the
carrier specified in the Carrier Number field. If you did not
enter a carrier number, or wish to change information for this
shipment, key the desired carrier name and address information.
15/08/17 Page
294
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Consignee (6,A):
(Press F4 for prompt) Key the consignee number for this
shipment. If the consignee is the customer, key the customer
number in this field.
Consignee Type (1,0):
This field is used with the Consignee Number field.
* 0 The value in the Consignee Number field is
a consignee. If you press <F4> with the cursor in that field,
BPCS displays the Trading Partners window (WINETP). Consignee
information selected from the window fills the Consignee Name
and Address fields directly below this field.
* 1 The value in the Consignee Number field is
a customer. If you press <F4> with the cursor in that field,
BPCS displays the Customer Alpha Lookup panel (ACR310).
Customer information selected from that panel fills the
Consignee Name and Address fields directly below this field.
Intermediate Consignee (6,A):
(Press F4 for prompt) Key the intermediate consignee number for
this shipment.
(Intermediate Consignee) Name (30,A):
Key the intermediate consignee name and address information for
this shipment.
Address 1 (30,A):
Key the intermediate consignee name and address information for
this shipment.
Address 2 (30,A):
Key the intermediate consignee name and address information for
15/08/17 Page
295
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
this shipment.
Address 3 (30,A):
Key the intermediate consignee name and address information for
this shipment.
State (3,A):
Key the intermediate consignee name and address information for
this shipment.
Postal Code (9,A):
Key the intermediate consignee name and address information for
this shipment.
Country (4,A):
Key the intermediate consignee name and address information for
this shipment.
Exporter EIN No. (15,A):
Key the exporter's Employer Identification Number (EIN).
Vehicle ID Number (8,A):
Key the vehicle I.D. number.
Point of Origin (20,A):
Key the point of origin for this shipment.
Route (6,A):
Key the route number for this shipment.
Loading Pier (20,A):
Key the loading pier for this shipment.
15/08/17 Page
296
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Ship Mode (5,A):
Key the shipping mode for this shipment.
Port of Export (20,A):
Key the port of export for this shipment.
Export Date (6,0):
Key the export date for this shipment. This field defaults to
the current date.
Port of Unload (20,A):
Key the port of unloading for this shipment.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Shipping Data Maintenance Panel
F14=Shipping Charges
Displays the Shipping Charges window (ORD590-06).
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
297
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Shipping Charges Window - ORD590-06
*************************************************************************
*******
* ORD590-04 *** System Software Associates, Inc. *** PC2047S1
10/22/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Shipping Data Maintenance SCHLAG
16:43:18*
*
*
* Document Number 1993-1023 Shipment Date . . . .
10/22/93 *
* Shipper Number 1 + Carrier Number . . . 2
+ *
* Name . . . . . JTS FREIGHT SERVICE AIRBORNE EXPRESS
*
* Address 1 . . . 15900 SOUTH HALSTED STREET 10700 WAVELAND
*
* Address 2 . . .
*
* Address 3 . . . HARVEY FRANKLIN PARK
*
* Ste/Post/Country IL 60604 USA IL 60344 USA
*
* Consignee . . . + 0 (0,1) Intermediate Consignee
+*
* Name . . . . .
*
* Address 1 . . .
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX *
* Address 2 . . . XX Shipping Charges
XX *
* Address 3 . . . XX
XX *
* Ste/Post/Country XX Prepaid Amount
XX *
* Exporter EIN No. XX Charges Advanced
XX *
* Point of Origin XX COD Amount
XX *
* Loading Pier XX Collection Fee
XX *
* Port of Export XX
XX *
* Port of Unload XX F1=Help F12=Cancel
XX *
*
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX *
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F14=Shipping Charges
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Shipping Charges Window
Prepaid Amount (13,2):
Key the prepaid amount for this shipment.
Charges Advanced (13,2):
Key the amount of any charges advanced for this shipment.
15/08/17 Page
298
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
COD Amount (13,2):
Key the COD amount for this shipment.
Collection Fee (13,2):
Key the amount of any collection fee for this shipment.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Shipping Charges Window
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
299
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Shipping Data Maintenance Panel - ORD590-05
Information printed on the Shipping Data Maintenance panel
prints on the Master Bill of Lading.
*************************************************************************
*******
* ORD590-05 * Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 * PC2047S1
10/22/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Shipping Data Maintenance SCHLAG
16:29:35*
*
*
* Document Number 1993-1022 Shipment Date . . . .
10/22/93 *
* Shipper Number 1 JTS FREIGHT SERVICE
*
* Carrier Number 2 AIRBORNE EXPRESS
*
* Consignee
*
* Type actions and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Revise 3=Copy 4=Delete
15=Notes*
*
*
* Act No.of Packages HM Description of Articles Weight UM
Class *
* 1 4 MISC. 7200 LB
75 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F11=Fold F12=Cancel
*
* F19=Update and Print
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Shipping Data Maintenance Panel
Header fields:
BPCS displays the document number, shipper number, consignee
number, carrier number, and shipment date from panel ORD590-04.
15/08/17 Page
300
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Action Code (2,A):
Key the action code from the list displayed at the top of the
panel.
* 1 (Create) in the first (blank) line to
create a new shipment line.
* 2 (Revise) to revise an existing record or to
reactivate an inactive record.
* 3 (Copy) to copy a record. BPCS creates
another shipment record in the first available blank line.
* 4 (Delete) to delete an existing record.
* 15 (Notes) create or revise Shipment Line
Notes. BPCS displays panel ORD140-01.
Number of Packages (9,0):
(Required) Key the number of packages in this shipment line.
HM (2,A):
If this is a hazardous material, key the hazardous materials
code. Reference only.
Description of Articles (30,A):
Key a description of the articles in this shipment line.
Weight (9,2):
Weight for this shipment line.
Unit of Measure (5,A):
Key the unit of measure for the weight entered in the preceding
field.
15/08/17 Page
301
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Class (6,A):
Key the class of material code or rate for this shipment line.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Shipping Data Maintenance Panel
F19=Update and Print
Updates and print the shipping documents.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
If you press <F11> to fold panel ORD590-05, BPCS displays
additional fields on the fold line.
ADDITIONAL FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Shipping Data Maintenance
Commodity (15,A):
Key the commodity code for this shipment line. This field is
for reference only.
Rate (9,3):
Key the rate for this shipment line.
Currency (3,A):
Key the currency code for this rate.
15/08/17 Page
302
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Inventory Status Maintenance
The Inventory Status Maintenance (WHM580) selection allows
maintenance of the Inventory Status Master on the Pallet
Inventory file. Individual pallets may be accessed discretely
by UPI (Unique Pallet Identifier) or processing may be by Item
Number / Location. In the latter case all pallets for that item
at the specified location are processed.
Either a UPI or a combination of Item Number and Location must
be entered.
15/08/17 Page
303
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Inventory Item Panel - WHM580-01
You can select records in one of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
304
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM580-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Inventory Status Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 1=Select 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Act Warehouse / Description Item Description
*
* __ __ _______________
*
* ED EAST DIST.-D2 FACILITY 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED
32OZ 8/C *
* ED EAST DIST.-D2 FACILITY 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED
12OZ 12/ *
* ED EAST DIST.-D2 FACILITY 3003 BEEF3 STEW CANNED 8OZ
18/C *
* WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED
32OZ 8/C *
* WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY 3002 BEEF2 STEW CANNED
12OZ 12/ *
* WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY 3003 BEEF3 STEW CANNED 8OZ
18/C *
* WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ
24/C *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
More..*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Select Inventory Item Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Warehouse (2,A):
Select a Warehouse for processing.
15/08/17 Page
305
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Item Number (15,A):
Select an item number for which all pallets for entered
location will be processed. The Item must exist on the Item
Master file and the combination of Item and Location must exist
on the Pallet Inventory file.
Available Actions - Select Inventory Item Panel
1=Select
8=Position To
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Inventory Item Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
306
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Update Inventory Status Panel - WHM580-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM580-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Inventory Status Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
* Warehouse . : ED EAST DIST.-D2 FACILITY
*
* Item. . . . : 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 8/CASE
*
*
*
*
*
* Mass update inventory status code to . _ +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* All inventory for zone range . . . . . ___ To 999
*
*
*
* All inventory for location range . . . ______ + To 999999 +
*
*
*
* All inventory for lot level range. . . __________ + To
9999999999 + *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F6=Accept F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Update Inventory Status Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Mass Update Inventory Status Code To
(WINIISD)
* Location Range /To (WINILM)
* Lot Level Range/To (WINIL1D)
15/08/17 Page
307
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Update Inventory Status Panel
Inventory Status (1,A):
Enter an Inventory Status code for mass update processing.
From/To Zone (3,A):
Enter the Zone, Location and Lot number ranges to determine
which pallets are to be selected for update. Please note that
the location range processing is on a pallet by pallet basis.
From/To Location (6,A):
Enter the Zone, Location and Lot number ranges to determine
which pallets are to be selected for update. Please note that
the location range processing is on a pallet by pallet basis.
From/To Lot Number (10,A):
Enter the Zone, Location and Lot number ranges to determine
which pallets are to be selected for update. Please note that
the location range processing is on a pallet by pallet basis.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Update Inventory Status Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
308
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Pallets Panel - WHM580-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM580-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/15/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Inventory Status Maintenance SCHLAG
10:28:23*
*
*
* Warehouse . : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Item. . . . : 3003 BEEF3 STEW CANNED 8OZ 18/CASE
*
* Inventory Status . : 3 Extended Quarantine
*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 4=Exclude 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Act Location Zone Lot UPI Existing
*
* Status
*
* MM0005 9310000136 16 4
*
* MM0005 9310000136 17 4
*
* MM0101 9310000136 20 4
*
* MM0102 9310000136 22 4
*
* MM0102 9310000136 23 4
*
* MM0103 9310000136 24 4
*
* MM0103 9310000136 25 4
*
* MM0104 9310000136 26 4
*
* MM0104 9310000136 27 4
*
* More...
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Select Pallets Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Available Actions - Select Pallets Panel
Standard:
15/08/17 Page
309
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
8=Position
Additional:
4=Exclude
Excludes the selected item from processing.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Pallets Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
310
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Inventory Status CodeList
This program allows you to request a printed list of Inventory
Status Code within Warehouse Management.
ACCESS: Warehouse Management Maintenance Menu (WHM01),
option 30
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM165-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Inventory Status Code List USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Inventory Status Code . . + To 9 +
*
*
*
*
*
* Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
15/08/17 Page
311
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Pallets Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
312
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Location Status Maintenance
The Location Status Maintenance (WHM590) selection allows
maintenance of the available for use status for a range of
locations. Additionally, the status of stock within these
locations can be maintained at pallet level.
Select Warehouse Locations Panel - WHM590-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM590-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Location Status Maintenance USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . +
*
*
*
* Location . . . . . . ______ + To 999999 +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Select Warehouse Locations Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
15/08/17 Page
313
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* From/To Location (WINILM)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Select Warehouse Locations Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Select an Warehouse to
process.
From Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a Location to be
the from value.
To Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a Location to be
the to value.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Warehouse Locations Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
314
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Location Status Maintenance Panel - WHM590-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM590-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/15/93*
* Location Status Maintenance SCHLAG
16:33:30*
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . : WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
*
*
* Location . . . . . : MM0100 To MM0100
*
*
*
* Current Status . . : B Being Emptied
*
*
*
* New Status . . . . . _ +
*
*
*
* Status of Stock . . . _ +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F6=Accept F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Location Status Maintenance Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* New Status (WINILSD)
* Status of Stock (WINIISD)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Location Status Maintenance Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
The selected Warehouse is displayed as entered on panel
WHM590-01, along with its associated description.
15/08/17 Page
315
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
From Location (6,A):
The selected From Location is displayed as entered on panel
WHM590-01.
To Location (6,A):
The selected To Location is displayed as entered on panel
WHM590-01.
Current Status (1,A):
The current stock location status code is displayed.
New Status (1,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the new Stock
Location Status Code.
Status of Stock (1,A):
Enter the desired location status for all of the locations in
the range. If the locations are not Main Storage, they are
updated with any valid status entered, including blanks, which
again makes them active. If the locations are Main Storage,
they are not allowed to have a blank status, they may be
updated to any valid status other than 'B', 'E', 'G', or 'F',
at the wish of the user. If the user selects a location to be
updated with a restricted status, it will only occur if the
location stock quantity should naturally merit such a status.
If not, it will be ignored.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Location Status Maintenance Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
316
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Inventory Transaction Posting
This program (WHM610) allows you to enter Inventory
Transactions for stock held within a managed warehouse. This
program should be used instead of Inventory Transaction
Processing (INV500) for managed warehouses.
15/08/17 Page
317
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Inventory Transactions Panel - WHM610-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM610-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU WHM Inventory Transaction Posting USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*Type options, press Enter.
*
* 1=Select
*
*
*
* Tran
*
* Opt Type Description
*
* A INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT
*
* D DOWNTIME REPORTED
*
* E ENGINEERING CHANGE NOTICE
*
* O OPENING BALANCE/PHYSICAL INV.
*
* RA RETURN AUTHORIZATION
*
* Y CYCLE COUNT ADJUSTMENT
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Select Inventory Transactions Panel
Option (2,A):
Select a Transaction Effect to process. Only Transaction
Effects un-related to any type of order are presented.
NOTE: The 0 transaction is for opening balances. The 0
transaction will replace the on-hand balance for a location
type A - Rejection, 1 - Picking or 2 - Replenishment, in other
words, Non-pallet location.
The 0 transaction ADDS the quantity for all other location
types because it assumes this is additional inventory on a new
pallet. Be sure you understand the location type you are
15/08/17 Page
318
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
adjusting.
Available Actions - Select Inventory Transactions Panel
1=Select
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Inventory Transactions Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
319
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Post Inventory Transactions Panel - WHM610-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM610-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU WHM Inventory Transaction Posting USER
HH:MM:
*
* Type choices, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Transaction Effect Code . . : A Inventory Adjustment
*
*
*
* Item Number . . . . . . . . . _______________ +
*
* Lot Number . . . . . . . . . __________
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . __ +
*
* Location . . . . . . . . . . ______ +
*
* Unique Pallet Identifier . .
*
* Quantity . . . . . . . . . .
*
* Reason Code . . . . . . . . . 01
*
* Comment . . . . . . . . . . . _______________
*
* Unit of Measure . . . . . . . __
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F14=Stock Inquiry
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Post Inventory Transactions Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Item Number (WINIIM)
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* Location (WINILM)
15/08/17 Page
320
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Post Inventory Transactions Panel
Item Number (15,A):
(Press F4 to access pop-up window.) Key the item number of the
item involved in the transaction being posted.
Lot Number (10,A):
You may key in a lot number or use this field to track item
receipts/expiration. This field appears even if your business
decided not to process by lot. (Entry is optional.)
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access pop-up window.) Key the warehouse code for
the item involved in the transaction being posted.
Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access pop-up window.) Key the location for this
transaction.
UPI (9,0):
Key the pallet number for this transaction.
Quantity (11,3):
This field contains the quantity of the specified item involved
in the transaction.
Redesignate (2,A):
Key the reason code for this particular transaction.
Transaction reason codes are maintained in INV140. The reason
code you enter here must already exist in a pair with the
transaction type being posted.
15/08/17 Page
321
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Comment (15,A):
Key the comment for this particular transaction. The comment is
recorded on the Inventory Transaction History file.
Unit of Measure (2,A):
Enter either the Stocking or Purchasing UM for the item. If
left blank, BPCS defaults to the Stocking UM.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Post Inventory Transactions Panel
F14=Stock Inquiry
Displays the Material Status Inquiry Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
322
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Delete Pallets Panel - WHM610-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM610-03 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU WHM Inventory Transaction Posting USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Warehouse : WD Location : DEFREC Lot :
*
* Location Balance : 720.00 New Location Balance : 792.00
*
* Select required option and press Enter. 4=Delete
*
* UPI Item Description Quantity
Sts*
* 40 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
* 41 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
* 42 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
* 43 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
* 44 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
* 45 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
* 46 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
* 47 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
* 48 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
* 49 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24
72.000 *
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Back F8=Fwd F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Delete Pallets Panel
Option (2,A):
Enter 4 to flag a pallet as deleted.
Quantity (11,3):
Enter the quantity contained on the pallet.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Delete Pallets Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
323
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
15/08/17 Page
324
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Purchase Order Manual Close
This program (WHM680) allows you to close Purchase Orders
manually.
15/08/17 Page
325
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Purchase Orders Panel - WHM680-01
Select records by entering the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. You can specify an
action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
326
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM680-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Manual Purchase Order Close USER
HH:MM:S
*
*
*
*
* Select action and press enter. 2=Revise 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Purchase
*
*Act Order Vendor Vendor Name Sts
*
* __
*
* __ 5060 30500 WEST COAST COMMODITIES 1
*
* __ 5062 40100 MEADE PAPER COMPANY 1
*
* __ 5063 40200 MIDWEST RUBBER PRODUCTS 1
*
* __ 5064 40300 GENERAL PEN CORPORATION 1
*
* __ 5065 40400 SUPREME WRITING TOOLS 1
*
* __ 5073 10100 BETTER FORM TUBES INC 1
*
* __ 5099 30200 IOWA BEEF DISTRIBUTORS 1
*
* __ 5101 10500 MONTREAL CLIP COMPANY 0
*
* __ 5102 10500 MONTREAL CLIP COMPANY 1
*
* __ 5104 10000 UTILITIES INCORPORATED 0
*
* __ 5105 30000 OFFICE SUPPLIES UNLIMITED 0
*
* More...
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
* F14=Purchase Order Inquiry
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Select Purchase Orders Panel
Action Code (2,0):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Purchase Order Number (6,0):
Key the purchase order number required to revise or position
to. If revision the purchase order number must be valid.
15/08/17 Page
327
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Vendor Number (5,0):
The number assigned to the supplier.
Vendor Name (30,A):
The name of the vendor.
Status (1,0):
The status of the purchase order header:
* '0' - Entered
* '1' - Part received/Fully costed
Available Actions - Select Purchase Orders Panel
2=Revise
8=Position
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Purchase Orders Panel
F14=Purchase Order Inquiry
Displays the Purchase Order Inquiry Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
328
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Close Purchase Orders Panel - WHM680-02
Select records by entering the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. You can specify an
action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
329
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM680-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/Y
* CPU Manual Purchase Order Close USER
HH:MM:S
*
* P.O.: 800981 Vendor: 30400 AMERICAN FOODS INC. Total
Lines: 3*
* Status: 1 Facility: Warehouse: WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
Cur: USD*
*
*
* Select action and press enter. 11=Select 13=De-select
*
* Quantity Quantity Costed
*
*Act Line Item Due Date Ordered Received Quantity
UM Sts*
* 1 3001 10/14/93 525.000 525.000 .000
CS *
* 2 3002 10/14/93 600.000 600.000 .000
CS *
* 3 3003 10/14/93 800.000 800.000 .000
CS *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom *
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward F11=Fold
F12=Cancel *
* F14=Close All Lines
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Close Purchase Orders Panel
Action Code (2,0):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Available Actions - Close Purchase Orders Panel
15/08/17 Page
330
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
11=Select
Selects the line for manual purchase order close
13=De-Select
De-selects the line for manual purchase order close
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Close Purchase Orders Panel
F14=Close All Lines
Close all purchase orders listed.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
331
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Unscheduled Receipts Manual Close
This program (WHM690) allows you to close Unscheduled Receipts
manually.
Select Unscheduled Receipts Panel - WHM690-01
Select records by entering the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. You can specify an
action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
332
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM690-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Manual Unscheduled Receipts Close USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 2=Revise 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Unscheduled
*
* Act Receipt Vendor Vendor Name Sts
*
* __
*
* __ 104 10200 NATIONAL INKS INCORPORATED 1
*
* __ 105 10000 UTILITIES INCORPORATED 1
*
* __ 106 30800 UNIVERSAL CAN COMPANY 1
*
* __ 107 40020 Midwest Supply Corporation 1
*
* __ 108 30100 SOUTH DAKOTA BEEF 1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* More...
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Select Unscheduled Receipts Panel
Action Code (2,0):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Unscheduled Receipt Number (6,0):
Key the U.R. number required to revise or position to. If
revision the U.R. number must be valid.
Vendor Number (5,0):
The number assigned to the supplier.
15/08/17 Page
333
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Vendor Name (30):
The name of the vendor.
Status (1,0):
The status of the U.R. header: '0' - Entered '1' - Part received
Available Actions - Select Unscheduled Receipts Panel
2=Revise
8=Position
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Select Unscheduled Receipts Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
334
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Close Unscheduled Receipts Panel - WHM690-02
Select records by entering the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. You can specify an
action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
335
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM690-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Manual Unscheduled Receipts Close USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
* U.R. 108 Vendor 30100 SOUTH DAKOTA BEEF Total
Lines 1*
* Status 1 Warehouse WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 11=Select 13=De-select
*
* Quantity Quantity Line
*
*Act Line Item Due Date Ordered Received UM Sts Whs
Status*
* 1 S420 10/14/93 18.000 .000 1 WD
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom *
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward F11=Fold
F12=Cancel *
* F14=Close All Lines
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Close Unscheduled Receipts Panel
Action Code (2,0):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Available Actions - Close Unscheduled Receipts Panel
11=Select
Selects the line for manual unscheduled receipts close.
15/08/17 Page
336
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
13=De-Select
De-selects the line for manual unscheduled receipts close.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Close Unscheduled Receipts Panel
F14=Close All Lines
Closes all unscheduled receipts displayed.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
337
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Clear Unscheduled Receipts
The Clear Unscheduled Receipts (WHM920) option allows you to
purge the Unscheduled Receipts files. Unscheduled Receipts are
deleted if they have been on the system for longer than the
number of days to keep receipts and if they have been fully
received/closed.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM920-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Clear Down Unscheduled Receipts USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type Desired Selection Criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Number of Days to Retain Receipts 99999
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter 1 0=Interactive, 1=Batch
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Clear Down Unscheduled Receipts Panel
Number of Days to Retain Receipts (5,0):
Enter the number of days that Unscheduled Receipts are to be
retained on the system.
15/08/17 Page
338
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Clear Down Unscheduled Receipts Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
339
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Count Worksheet Selection
The Stock Count Worksheet Selection (WHM311) provides a printed
list of items needing to be cycle counted.
ACCESS: Warehouse Management Inventory Menu (
WHM02)
15/08/17 Page
340
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel - WHM311-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM311-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Stock Count Worksheet Selection USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Select by Item or Location or Class _
*
* (I = Item L = Location C =
Class) *
* Warehouse : __ +
*
*
*
* Item Criteria Location Criteria Class Criteria
*
*
*
* ABC Code Zone Item Class
*
* Item Class Location
*
* Item Number Item Number
*
* Lot Number Lot Number
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Warehouse (WINIWM)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS- Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel
Select by Item, Location or Class (1,A):
Enter I to select by Item, L to select by Location or C to
select by Class.
15/08/17 Page
341
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to prompt.) Enter the two character warehouse for
which to produce a stock count worksheet.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
342
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel - WHM311-02
This panel displays if you chose Select by Item on the first
panel.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM311-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/12/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Stock Count Worksheet Selection SCHLAG
11:35:04 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* From To
*
*
*
* ABC Code 9
*
* Item Class 99
*
* Item 999999999999999
*
* Lot Number 9999999999
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter 0 (0 - Interactive 1 - Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel
From/To ABC Code (1,A):
Enter the From ABC Code and the To ABC Code. The ABC code used
is the one contained on the Item master record. The From ABC
Code may not be greater than the To ABC Code.
15/08/17 Page
343
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
From/To Item Class (2,A):
Enter the From Item Class and the To Item Class. The From Item
Class may not be greater than the To Item Class.
From/To Item Number (15,A):
Enter the From Item Number and the To Item Number. The From
Item Number may not be greater than the To Item Number.
From/To Lot Number (10,A):
Enter the From Lot Number and the To Lot Number. The From Lot
Number may not be greater than the To Lot Number.
Run Time Parameter (1,A):
Enter 0 to run this program interactively or 1 to run it in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
344
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel - WHM311-03
This panel displays if you chose Select by Location on the
first panel.
*************************************************************************
*******
*WHM311-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/12/93 *
*SSAUSCH0 Stock Count Worksheet Selection SCHLAG
14:15:32 *
*
*
*
*
* From To
*
*
*
* Zone 100 999
*
* Location 999999
*
* Item 999999999999999
*
* Lot 9999999999
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter 0 (0 - Interactive 1 - Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel
From/To Zone (3,A):
Enter the From Zone and the To Zone. The From Zone may not be
greater than the To Zone.
15/08/17 Page
345
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
From/To Location (6,A):
Enter the From Location and the To Location. The From Location
may not be greater than the To Location. The location range
processing is on a character-by-character basis, as used by
Group Location Maintenance (WHM120).
From/To Item (15,A):
Enter the From/To Items for which you would like to generate a
stock count worksheet. The From Item cannot be greater than the
To Item.
From/To Lot (10,A):
Enter the From/To Lots for which you would like to generate a
stock count worksheet. The From Lot cannot be greater than the
To Lot.
NOTE: If you select by location and you left the From/To Item
Number and From/To Lot Number fields blank, then BPCS prints
Stock Count Worksheets for all locations within the Zone and
Location range you entered, regardless of whether they contain
records or not.
Run Time Parameter (1,A):
Enter 0 to run the worksheet interactively or 1 to run it in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
346
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel - WHM311-04
This panel displays if you chose Select by Item Class on the
first panel.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM311-04 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/15/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Stock Count Worksheet Selection SCHLAG
11:36:15 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
* From To
*
*
*
* Item Class 99
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter 0 (0 - Interactive 1 - Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel
From/To Item Class (2,A):
Enter the From Item Class and the To Item Class . The From Item
Class may not be greater than the To Item Class.
15/08/17 Page
347
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Run Time Parameter (1,A):
Enter 0 to run this program interactively or 1 to run it in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Stock Count Worksheet Selection Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
348
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Unposted Stock Counts
Unposted Stock Count Report Selection (WHM312) allows selection
of the Warehouse to be reported on. The resulting report
contains details of all unposted Stock Counts. Details included
in the report for each unposted Stock Count Detail are Item,
Description, Lot, Location, Unit of Measure, Sequence Number
and UPI within the selected warehouse.
ACCESS: Warehouse Management Inventory Menu (WHM02)
Unposted Stock Count Report - WHM312-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM312-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Unposted Stock Count Report USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . . . WD +
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F18=Interactive
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Unposted Stock Count Report Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following field:
Warehouse (WINIWM)
15/08/17 Page
349
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Unposted Stock Count Report Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the warehouse for
which to produce a stock count report.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Unposted Stock Count Report Panel
F18=Interactive
Runs the report interactively rather than in batch.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
350
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Count Post
The Stock Count Posting program (WHM640) may be used for one-
or two- step stock counting. You designate the method for each
managed warehouse using Warehouse Master Maintenance.
The program has two input panels for the actual amounts of the
items that you have counted. The panels are identical for one-
and two-step stock counting. However, the processing methods
are very different.
One-Step Stock Counting
The data that you must enter on the panel comes from the stock
count sheets, which include the pre-printed data and the
quantity that you actually counted.
After you enter the data and print the stock count sheet, the
system edit checks your entries to see if any inventory
transactions have been posted since the item was SELECTED for
stock counting. BPCS compares the item sequence number on this
panel (from the IWI/ILI file) with the same field in the Item
Master file. (The field on the Item Master does not display in
Item Master Maintenance - INV100 and therefore is not
maintainable.) If the two are not equal (Item Master value is
greater), it means that there have been new inventory
transactions. A new panel shows you a transaction history for
the item, showing each new inventory transaction. The history
includes ONLY transactions that are not stock count
transactions and that are for the SAME warehouse and location.
Possible transactions include adjustments, shop single issues,
receipts, etc.
You may either cancel the posting or continue with an adjusted
stock count. If you continue, the stock count posting program
updates the book inventory value for each item. In addition,
the program clears the item sequence number. The Stock Count
15/08/17 Page
351
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
post program also adds to (or creates, as appropriate) the ISI
file (sequential Stock Count file used for reporting) and
produces an audit trail of all posting. Keep in mind that the
inventory update is AUTOMATIC.
When you post transactions for periods that have already been
closed through the Inventory Month-End Close program (INV900),
BPCS updates the appropriate year-to-date totals. In this case,
the current month totals are not affected by the posting. If
the transaction updates detail historical records, the previous
month totals are updated accordingly. Detail historical records
are stored in the Inventory Warehouse Master (IWM), Company
Master (RCM), and Salesman Master files (SSM).
After you end the program, you should run the Stock Count
Variance report, WHM250 (by item).
Two-Step Stock Counting
If you use two-step stock counting, the program operates the
same except for two important differences. First, the panel
does NOT display any transactions that have been posted for the
item since it was selected for stock counting. It is up to you
to consider any such activity.
Second, the program does NOT update the inventory book values
with the stock count results. Again, that must be done
manually. With two-step stock counting, the WHM640 program
builds or adds to the ISI file used for printing the
book/actual variance reports. The person responsible for
controlling inventory must print and examine the reports, take
into account any recent inventory transactions (since item
selection), and decide which inventory values to post with the
stock count data.
Then, Inventory Transaction post (WHM610) must be run to adjust
the inventory with a transaction type specially defined for
stock counting. Again, if you are posting to closed periods,
BPCS updates MTD and YTD history fields as described for step 1.
15/08/17 Page
352
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Select Transaction Type Panel - WHM640-01
This panel lists all of the transaction effects that you have
set up with a "Y" in the Cycle Count field through the
Transaction Effects Maintenance (INV150) program. Thus, it
allows you to post the stock count results with a transaction
that affects either the opening balance field in the Item
Master, or the adjustment field. This depends on your entry of
"Y" in either one of these other INV150 fields. Please note
that you must have AT LEAST one transaction effect set up
through INV150 that has a "Y" in the Cycle Count field.
15/08/17 Page
353
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM640-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Stock Count Post USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* A9 Adjustment, W/ Cycle Count
*
* Y Cycle Count Adjustment
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Transaction type __
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Select Transaction Type Panel
Transaction Type (2,A):
Key the transaction type which you want to use for posting your
stock count results from the list displayed on panel WHM640-01.
You must make an entry in this field to continue.
PROCESSING OPTOINS - Select Transaction Type Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
354
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Post Stock Counts Panel - WHM640-02
This panel lets you enter the results of your stock count. It
is divided into three parts:
The first part of the panel is for entering the data for each
item that you have stock counted and are posting.
The middle of the panel has two batch totals. The Quantity and
Transactions are control totals for the current posting
session. They represent running totals of all quantities posted
and the number of different transactions. They are intended to
help you keep track of your posting.
The lower right part of the panel shows the transaction data
for the previous item that was posted (accepted) in this
session. Of course, the data is blank for the first item
posted. This is for your convenience in keeping track of your
posting.
15/08/17 Page
355
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM640-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Stock Count Post USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
* Item 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24/CASE
*
* Warehouse WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Location DEFREC WD Default Receiving Dock
*
* Lot
*
* Stock Seq# 169
*
* Trans Date 10/14/93
*
* Quantity .000
*
* Comment
*
* Reason Code 01 DAILY CYCLE COUNT
*
*
*
* Batch Totals: Last Transaction
*
* Quantity .000 Item
*
* Transactions 0 Whse
*
* Loc
*
* Lot
*
* Qty .000
*
* Date 0/00/00
*
* Seq# 0
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Post Stock Counts Panel
Enter the data into the fields on the panel using the
computer-printed information on the stock count sheets for each
item and your actual count data.
Item (15,A):
Key the item number for which you are entering stock count data.
Warehouse (2,A):
Key the code of the warehouse in which the item is found. The
same item number can be in different warehouses, so you MUST
15/08/17 Page
356
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
enter the warehouse to keep proper inventory control. (This
field defaults to blanks, but you must make an entry).
Location (6,A):
Key the location in which the item is found. If you are not
using locations in your inventory, this field is not displayed.
Lot (10,A):
Key the lot number in which the item is found. This field is
only for lot-controlled items. (This field cannot be used for
items which are not lot-controlled.)
Stock Seq # (5,0):
Key the stock count sequence number from the stock count sheet.
Remember that it came from the item's IWI/ILI record (and
originally from the Item Master). Your entry here is validated
against the current sequence number from the IWI/ILI file.
Trans Date (6,0):
Key the date of the stock count posting transaction. This field
defaults to today's date. You can override it and enter another
date, if desired.
Quantity (11,3):
Key the actual quantity that you counted in inventory for this
item. Negative quantities are not allowed. (The field defaults
to blanks, but you must make an entry). If the location is a
palletised location, then this field must be left blank.
Comment (15,A):
Key any comment you want to associate with this item's stock
count. The entry is not edited. It is used for inquiries
(INV300) and reports.
15/08/17 Page
357
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Reason Code (2,A):
Key the transaction reason code for this stock count
transaction. Reason codes are set up and maintained through
Reason Code Maintenance (INV140).
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Post Stock Counts Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
NOTE: Edit checks your entries. If they are valid, the program
continues processing. If you are using two-step stock counting,
BPCS displays panel INV515-03. If you are using one-step stock
counting, BPCS checks for additional inventory transactions. If
there are other transactions for the item, BPCS continues to
panel WHM640-04.
15/08/17 Page
358
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Display Transaction History - WHM640-04
If you are using one-step stock counting, entering valid data
on panel WHM640-02 causes BPCS to check for any inventory
transactions for the item since it was selected for stock
counting. It does this by comparing the Sequence Number on the
first panel (from the IWI/ILI file) to the Sequence Number from
the Item Master file. A discrepancy means that at least one
transaction has been posted in the interim. BPCS displays panel
WHM640-04 to show the transaction history. Note that BPCS looks
ONLY for transactions for the SAME warehouse and SAME location.
Panel WHM640-04 displays each non-stock counting transaction
posted for the item since stock count selection. The purpose of
this is to let you determine whether or not there are known
reasons for book/actual differences in inventory levels and
adjust your stock count value accordingly.
For example, assume that stock count sheets are printed in the
morning. Later, after the count but before posting, 100
additional pieces of the item are received on a purchase order.
When the count is posted later, the on-hand inventory shows 100
more than were counted. The receipt transaction explains this,
it's not really a variance, and you can adjust the stock count
amount accordingly.
15/08/17 Page
359
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM640-04 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/12/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Stock Count Post SCHLAG
11:53:47*
*
*
* Item 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24/CASE
*
* Warehouse WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Location DEFREC Lot Sequence# 169 Quantity
.000*
* Comment
*
* Transaction Ref# Lot Seq Balance Date
Qty/Commnt*
* A Inventory Adjust 107 10800.000 9/23/93
*
* A Inventory Adjust 106 10790.000 9/23/93
*
* A Inventory Adjust 105 10780.000 9/23/93
*
* A Inventory Adjust 104 10770.000 9/23/93
*
* A Inventory Adjust 103 10760.000 9/23/93
*
* A Inventory Adjust 102 10750.000 9/23/93
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* END OF RECORDS
*
* Quantity .000
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Forward F8=Back F11=Fold F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Display Transaction History Panel
The top of the panel shows the same item information that was
on the previous panel: item number, warehouse, location, lot,
etc., including your quantity (actual count) entry.
Below the item information, the panel displays the inventory
transactions that have been made for the item since it was
selected for stock counting. The transactions are listed in
reverse date order (the most current transaction is the first
one listed). For each transaction, the panel shows the data
that you entered when you posted the transaction in WHM610,
WHM550, or another similar posting program.
15/08/17 Page
360
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Of importance here are: the type of transaction (Transaction),
the amount of the item posted (Quantity), the date it was
posted (Date), and the resulting new inventory balance of the
item (Balance). Note that the date is the date the transaction
was input to inventory (posted), not necessarily the actual
date of the transaction.
Quantity (11,3):
This is the only input field on this panel. Enter the stock
count quantity (actual inventory). The default value of the
field is the amount you entered on panel WHM640-02 and is the
same as the Quantity shown in the top portion of the panel.
After you review the transactions shown on this panel, you can
override the stock count quantity by keying in a new value.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Display Transaction History Panel
Enter
Accepts the quantity at the lower right of the panel as the
Stock Count Quantity. This is either the default quantity
(which is your original stock count value) or an adjusted
quantity (that you input on this panel after reviewing the
transactions).
NOTE: Make sure the desired value is in the Quantity field
BEFORE you press Enter. The value that appears in the Quantity
field is the stock count value that is posted to your inventory
after you go to the next panel where you can accept the data or
reject and re-enter it.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
361
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Count Post Panel - WHM640-03
After you have entered the appropriate data on the detail stock
count posting panel or entered a quantity on the Display
Transaction History panel, the Stock Count Post panel
(WHM640-03) appears.
This panel displays the stock count data for the item you are
processing. The data is "protected." You cannot make entries
on this panel. The purpose is for you to verify the stock count
quantity one last time before it is posted. For both one- and
two-step stock counting, this quantity is used to update the
Stock Counting History file (ISI) that is used to produce the
variance reports.
However, it is especially important for you to remember that if
you are using one-step stock counting, the quantity shown here
AUTOMATICALLY updates your inventory book value when the
posting is complete. BPCS calculates the variance between the
book and stock count values and creates a transaction (type as
you have defined in INV150) to adjust the inventory for THIS
LOCATION, as appropriate. The "On-hand this location" field on
this panel includes the adjustment.
15/08/17 Page
362
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM640-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/15/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Stock Count Post SCHLAG
10:56:17*
*
*
* Item 3004 BEEF4 STEW CANNED 4OZ 24/CASE
*
* Warehouse WD WEST DIST.CTR-D1 FACILITY
*
* Location KASHIP test
*
* Lot
*
* Stock Seq# 85
*
* Trans Date 9/23/93
*
* Quantity 100.000 U/M EA
*
* Comment
*
* Reason Code 01 DAILY CYCLE COUNT
*
*
*
* On-hand this Location 100.000
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F21=Reject
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Stock Count Post Panel
The top of the panel shows the same item information that was
on the previous panels: item number, warehouse, location, lot,
etc., including your quantity (actual count) entry.
On-hand This Location (11,3):
Displays the quantity on-hand for this location including any
adjustment made to reconcile book and stock count values.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Stock Count Post Panel
15/08/17 Page
363
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Enter
Accepts the displayed data and posts it. BPCS returns you to
WHM640-01 to select another item. Remember, be sure of your
data before accepting it, particularly with One-Step Stock
Counting.
BPCS prints the WHM640 Stock Count Post Audit Report, which
lists the item number, item description, warehouse, locations,
lot, stock count sequence number, posting quantity, posting
date, and any comments from panel WHM640-02.
F21=Reject
Rejects the transaction and returns to the detail entry panel
(WHM640-02) for re-entry of stock count data.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
364
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Post Pallet Counts Panel - WHM640-05
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM640-05 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/20/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Stock Count Post SCHLAG
10:50:52*
*
*
* Item K100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Loc KADFLT
Seq 85*
* Warehouse KA KIM TEST WHSE Lot
*
*
*
* 1=Quantity Breakdown 3=Lost Pallets*
*
*
*
* Status Pallets* Quantity Status Pallets*
Quantity *
* 1 15
*
* 2 16
*
* 3 17
*
* 4 18
*
* 5
*
* 6
*
* 7
*
* 8
*
* 9
*
* 10
*
* 12
*
* 14
+ *
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Accept F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Post Pallet Counts Panel
Status (1,A)
Enter 1 to display the quantity breakdown window. Enter 3 to
post a zero quantity against the pallet.
Pallets (10,A)
Enter the UPI number associated with the location.
15/08/17 Page
365
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Quantity (11,3)
Enter the quantity counted against each pallet.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Post Pallet Counts Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
366
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Count Variance Report
The Stock Count Variance Report (WHM250) allows entry of the
parameters required for a report run. The resulting report
contains details relating to each Stock Count variance by item
number. Details included in the report for each load are Item,
Description, Lot, Location, U/M UPI, Count Quantity, Book
Quantity, Count-Book, Cost/Unit and Total Variance.
ACCESS: Warehouse Management Inventory Menu (WHM02)
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM250-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Stock Count Variance Report USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse __ +
*
*
*
* From Stock Count Posted Date 1/01/00 ( MMDDYY Format
) *
* To Stock Count Posted Date 12/31/99 ( MMDDYY Format
) *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F18=Interactive
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Stock Count Variance Report Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Warehouse (WINIWM)
15/08/17 Page
367
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Stock Count Variance Report Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the warehouse
against which you want to run a stock count variance report.
The warehouse must be a valid WHM warehouse.
From/To Stock Count Posted Date (6,0):
Optional. Enter the beginning and ending dates for which you
want to run the report.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Stock Count Variance Report Panel
F18=Interactive
Runs the report interactively rather than in batch.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
368
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Count Purge
Use Stock Count Purge (WHM830) to delete old, unneeded stock
count records from your files. Records can be selected for
deletion based on a range of warehouses and up to a specified
ending date.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM830-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Purge Stock Count File by Date USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
*
* Enter required selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse Code . . . . . . . . __ + To 99 +
*
* Include Posted Records . . . . 0 (0=No, 1=Yes)
*
* Stock Count Ending Date . . . 9/23/93 ( MMDDYY Format )
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
* All Stock Count Dates on or before the
*
* Date entered will be physically deleted
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Purge Stock Count File by Date Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
From/To Warehouse Code (WINIWM)
15/08/17 Page
369
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Purge Stock Count File by Date Panel
Warehouse Code (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a Warehouse to be
the from value.
To Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a Warehouse to be
the to value.
Include Posted Records (1,0)
Specify whether or not you want to purge records that have been
posted
(0=No, 1=Yes)
Stock Count Ending Date (6,0):
In MMDDYY format, enter the last date for which you want stock
counts to be purged. All stock count dates on or before the
date entered will be physically deleted
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Purge Stock Count File by Date Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
370
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Consolidation of Stock Report
The Consolidation of Stock Report (WHM220) selection allows
entry of the parameters required for a report run. The
resulting report contains the following details for each item
matching the selection criteria : Item, Item Description, Lot
Number, Total Quantity, Reserved Quantity, Location and Unique
Pallet Identifier (UPI).
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM220-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Consolidation of Stock Report USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . WS +
*
*
*
* Item Number . . . . . _______________ + To 999999999999999 +
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter. . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Consolidation of Stock Report Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse Code (WINIWM)
* Item Number(WINIIM)
15/08/17 Page
371
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Consolidation of Stock Report Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid warehouse
code for report.
From/To Item (15,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up windows.) Enter the first and
last items that are to appear on the report. If the entries
made here do not represent valid item codes, the next item in
sequence will be the first item to be printed.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Consolidation of Stock Report Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
372
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Inventory Status List
The Inventory Status List (WHM230) provides a printed list of
the status of the inventory held against each item within a
selected range of warehouses and item numbers. The list
provides such information as the pallets holding the stock, the
quantity available, the quantity reserved etc.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM230-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Inventory Status Code List USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse Code . . . . . __ + To 99 +
*
*
*
* Item Code . . . . . . . . _______________ + To
999999999999999 + *
*
*
* Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Inventory Status List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse Code (WINIWM)
* Item Number (WINIIM)
15/08/17 Page
373
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Inventory Status List Panel
From/To Warehouse Code (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the From
Warehouse Code and the To Warehouse Code. The From Warehouse
Code may not be greater than the To Warehouse Code.
From/To Item Code (15,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the From Item
Number and the To Item Number. The From Item Number may not be
greater than the To Item Number.
Record Status (1,0):
Enter 0 for all records or a 1 for only active records.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Inventory Status List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
374
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Location Status List
The Location Status List (WHM240) provides a printed list of
the current status of the locations defined to the Warehouse
Management System.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM240-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Location Status List USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse Code . . . . . . __ + To 99 +
*
*
*
* Location . . . . . . . . . ______ + To 999999 +
*
*
*
* Status . . . . . . . . . . _ To 9
*
*
*
* Record Status . . . . . . 1 (0=All Records, 1=Active Only)
*
*
*
* Run Time Parameter . . . 1 (0=Interactive, 1=Batch)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Location Status List Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse Code (WINIWM)
* Location (WINILM)
15/08/17 Page
375
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Location Status List Panel
From/To Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the From
Warehouse Code and To Warehouse Code. The From Warehouse Code
may not be greater than the To Warehouse Code.
From/To Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter the From Location
and To Location. The From Location may not be greater than the
To Location.
From/To Status (1,A):
Enter the From Location Status and To Location Status. The From
Location Status may not be greater than the To Location Status.
Record Status (1,0):
Enter 0 for all records or a 1 for only active records.
Run Time Parameter (1,0):
Enter 0 to process this job interactively or a 1 to process in
batch.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Location Status List Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
376
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Delivery Inquiry
The Delivery Inquiry (WHM300) selection allows the details of a
single delivery or group of deliveries to be displayed.
An initial selection screen is displayed, from which several
selections may be made (at least one selection must be made).
Only deliveries matching the requested parameters are displayed
on the subsequent screen.
From the second screen it is possible to inquire on the order
directly by use of a function key. It is also possible to
request a more detailed display of a particular delivery from
here.
15/08/17 Page
377
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Delivery Inquiry Selection Panel - WHM300-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM300-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Delivery Inquiry-Selection USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse. . . . . . . . . . . . WS +
*
*
*
* Delivery Number. . . . . . . . . To 999999
*
*
*
* Expected Date. . . . . . . . . . 0/00/00 To 12/31/99
*
*
*
* Actual Date. . . . . . . . . . . 0/00/00 To 12/31/99
*
*
*
* Order Number . . . . . . . . . . To 999999
*
*
*
* Order Type . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (1=Purchase, 2=Resupply)
*
* (3=Unscheduled Receipt)
*
*
*
* Statuses to Include. . . . . . . 1 2 3 (0=Booked, 1=Partially
Received) *
* (2=Fully Received,
3=Cancelled) *
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Delivery Inquiry Selection Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
Warehouse (WINIWM)
15/08/17 Page
378
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Delivery Inquiry Selection Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Enter a valid warehouse
for processing. An entry must be made in this selection.
From/To Delivery Number (6,0):
Optional. Enter the From/To Delivery Numbers as the range of
deliveries to be displayed. The From Delivery Number cannot be
greater than the To Delivery Number.
From/To Expected Date (6,0):
Optional. Enter the From/To Expected Delivery Dates as the
range of expected delivery dates to be displayed. The From
Expected Date cannot be greater than the To Expected Date.
From/To Actual Date (6,0):
Optional. Enter the From/To Actual Delivery Dates as the range
of expected delivery dates to be displayed. The From Actual
Date cannot be greater than the To Actual Delivery Date.
From/To Order Number (6,0):
Optional. Enter the From/To Order Numbers as the range of order
numbers to be displayed. The From Order Number cannot be
greater than the To Order Number.
Order Type (1,A):
Enter the type of the orders to be displayed. A selection must
be made here if an order number range is specified. The valid
order types are:
* '1' - Purchase
* '2' - Resupply
15/08/17 Page
379
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
* '3' - Unscheduled Receipt
Statuses to Include (1,0):
Enter the status(es) of deliveries which are to be displayed.
This selection is optional. Up to three statuses may be
entered. Valid values are :
* '0' - Booked
* '1' - Received
* '2' - Putaway
* '3' - Canceled
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Delivery Inquiry Selection Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
380
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Delivery Inquiry Summary Panel - WHM300-02
Based on the selection criteria, orders are displayed on the
Delivery Inquiry Summary Panel. Use this panel to review
deliveries. You can select records in one of two ways:
Enter the relevant information and the
appropriate action code on the first detail line of the panel,
or
Enter the appropriate action code to the
left of the record you want to process. This option lets you
specify an action for more than one record.
When you press Enter to process the panel, the action you have
specified takes place. If you have specified actions for more
than one record, the actions occur in the sequence listed.
15/08/17 Page
381
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM300-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/20/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Delivery Inquiry-Summary SCHLAG
15:30:12 *
*
*
* Select action and press Enter. 5=Display 8=Position To
*
*
*
* Expected Actual Order Typ
St *
* Act Whs Delivery Description Date Date Number
*
* __
*
* 55 10 To Days Delivery 8/25/93 8/25/93 800818 1
2 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom *
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel F14=Stock
Inquiry *
* F15=Customer Order Inq F16=Shop Order Inq F17=PO Inquiry
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Delivery Inquiry Summary Panel
Action (2,A):
Enter an available action code to the left of the record or
records to be processed. When you press Enter, BPCS processes
the specified actions in the sequence displayed.
Warehouse (2,A):
Displays the warehouse for a delivery matching the selection
criteria.
15/08/17 Page
382
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Delivery Number (6,0):
Displays the delivery number for a delivery matching the
selection criteria.
Description (30,A):
Displays the delivery description for a delivery matching the
selection criteria.
Expected Date (6,0):
Displays the expected date for a delivery matching the
selection criteria.
Actual Date (6,0):
Displays the actual date for a delivery matching the selection
criteria.
Order Number (6,0):
Displays the order number for a delivery matching the selection
criteria.
Type (1,A):
Displays the order type for a delivery matching the selection
criteria.
Status (1,0):
Displays the status of a delivery matching the selection
criteria.
Available Actions - Delivery Inquiry Summary Panel
15/08/17 Page
383
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
5=Display
8=Position to
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Delivery Inquiry Summary Panel
F14=Stock Inquiry
Displays the Stock Inquiry Panel.
F15=Customer Order Inquiry
Displays the Customer Order Inquiry Panel.
F16=Shop Order Inquiry
Displays the Shop Order Inquiry Panel.
F17=Purchase Order Inquiry
Displays the Purchase Order Inquiry Panel.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
384
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Delivery Inquiry Detail Panel - WHM300-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM300-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/14/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Delivery Inquiry-Detail SCHLAG
15:25:06 *
*
*
* Warehouse . . . : WS WHM TEST - MANAGED WHSE
*
* Delivery . . . : 9 test whm1ws Status . . .
: 2 *
*
*
* Expected Date: 9/01/93 From Time: 8:00 To: 9:00 Receiving Location:
DREC *
* Actual Date : 8/31/93 From Time: 18:31 To: 19:31 Receiving Location:
DREC *
*
*
* Order Expected Accepted Rejected
Act *
* No/Type Item Quantity Quantity Quantity U/M
Pals *
* 800821 WHM1 500.000 500.000 EA
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom *
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F11=Fold F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Delivery Inquiry Detail Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
Displays the warehouse for the selected delivery.
Warehouse Description (30,A):
Displays the warehouse description for the selected warehouse.
15/08/17 Page
385
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Delivery Number (6,0):
Displays the delivery number for the selected delivery.
Delivery Description (30,A):
Displays the delivery description for the selected delivery.
Status (1,0):
Displays the status of the selected delivery.
Expected Date (6,0):
Displays the expected date for the selected delivery.
From/To Expected Time (4,0):
Displays the expected from and to times for the selected
delivery.
Receiving Location (6,A):
Displays the expected receiving location for the selected
delivery.
In-Transit (1,0):
Displays the whether the delivery is expected to consist of
goods that are in transit.
Actual Date (6,0):
Displays the actual date for the selected delivery.
From/To Actual Time (4,0):
Displays the actual from/to time for the selected delivery.
15/08/17 Page
386
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Receiving Location (6,A):
Displays the actual receiving location for the selected
delivery.
In-Transit (1,0):
Displays the whether the delivery contains in transit goods.
Order Number (6,0):
Displays a list of order numbers that are associated with the
selected delivery.
Order Type (1,A):
Displays the type of each order associated with the selected
delivery.
Item (15,A):
Displays the items on each order associated with the selected
delivery.
Lot (10,A):
Displays the lot identification for each item of each order
associated with the selected delivery.
Accepted Quantity (9,2):
Displays the quantity accepted for each item of each order
associated with the selected delivery.
Rejected Quantity (9,2):
Displays the quantity rejected for each item of each order
associated with the selected delivery.
15/08/17 Page
387
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Unit of Measure (2,A):
Displays the unit of measure for each item of each order
associated with the selected delivery.
Actual Pallets (7,0):
Displays the actual number of pallets used to contain the
accepted quantity of each item for each order associated with
the selected delivery.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Delivery Detail Inquiry Panel
F11=Fold
Fold the panel to reveal more fields (i.e., Description, Lot
and Status).
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
388
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Inquiry
The Stock Inquiry (WHM310) selection allows inquiries to be
made on pallet inventory items within the Warehouse Management
System.
The initial screen displayed allows multiple selections to be
made so that only those items required are displayed on the
subsequent screen.
The second screen will display the pallet inventory information
that matches the search criteria specified in the initial
screen.
15/08/17 Page
389
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Inquiry Selection Panel - WHM310-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM310-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Stock Inquiry-Selection USER
HH:MM:
*
*
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
*
*
* Warehouse (required) . . . . . . WS +
*
* Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _______________ +
*
* Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________ To __________
*
* Location . . . . . . . . . . . . ______ + To ______ +
*
* Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___ To ___
*
* UPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To
*
* Receipt Date . . . . . . . . . . 0/00/00 To 0/00/00
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Stock Inquiry Selection Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* Item Number (WINIIM)
* Location (WINILM)
15/08/17 Page
390
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Stock Inquiry Selection Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Specify the warehouse
required for inquiry. This is the only selection which must
contain a value. The entered warehouse must exist on file.
Item (15,A):
Specify the item to be displayed/selected. This selection must
contain a valid value.
From/To Lot (10,A):
Specify the lots at which the inquiry is to start and stop
displaying details.
From/To Location (6,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Specify the locations
at which the inquiry is to start and stop displaying details.
From/To Zone (6,A):
Specify the zones at which the inquiry is to start and stop
displaying details.
From/To Unique Pallet Identifier (6,0):
Specify the UPIs at which the inquiry is to start and stop
displaying details.
From/To Receipt Date (6,0):
Specify the receipt dates at which the inquiry is to start and
stop displaying details.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Stock Inquiry Selection Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
391
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
15/08/17 Page
392
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Stock Inquiry Detail Panel - WHM310-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM310-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/14/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Stock Inquiry-Detail SCHLAG
15:35:51 *
*
*
* Warehouse . : KA KIM TEST WHSE
*
* Select action and press Enter. 5=Display
*
* Receipt On Hand
Rsrvd *
* A Loc Seq St Item Lot UPI Date Qty
Qty St *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 1 9/09/93 10
5 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 2 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 3 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 4 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 5 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 6 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 7 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 8 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 9 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 10 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 11 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 12 9/09/93 10
0 *
* _ KADFLT 1 G K100 13 9/09/93 10
0 *
*
More... *
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel F24=More Keys
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Stock Inquiry Detail Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
Displays the warehouse selected for inquiry.
Description (30,A):
Displays the description of the warehouse selected for inquiry.
15/08/17 Page
393
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Action (2,A):
Enter the action code to the left of the Location field to
display Location History for the selected locations.
Location (6,A):
Displays the location for each inventory record matching
selection criteria.
Sequence (3,A):
Displays one line for each lot / location / warehouse
combination, sequenced by warehouse, lot number and location.
If lots or locations are not used, they display as blanks.
Status (1,A):
Displays the status for each inventory pallet record matching
selection criteria. Valid values for the status are contained
in the inventory status file.
Item (15,A):
Displays the item number for each inventory record matching
selection criteria.
Lot (10,A):
Displays the lot number for each inventory record matching
selection criteria.
Description (12,A):
Displays the short form of the description of the item for each
inventory record matching selection criteria.
Unique Pallet Identifier (UPI) (6,0):
Displays the UPI for each inventory record matching selection
criteria.
15/08/17 Page
394
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Receipt Date (6,0):
Displays the receipt date for each inventory record matching
selection criteria.
On Hand Quantity (5,0):
Displays the available quantity for each inventory record
matching selection criteria. This figure is expressed in units
of the item.
Reserved Quantity (5,0):
Displays the reserved quantity for each inventory record
matching selection criteria. This figure is expressed in units
of the item.
Available Actions - Stock Inquiry Detail Panel
5=Display
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Stock Inquiry Detail Panel
F14=Delivery Inquiry
Displays the Delivery Inquiry Panel
F16=Material Inquiry
Displays the Material Inquiry Panel
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
395
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Location History Panel - WHM310-03
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM310-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/20/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Location History SCHLAG
11:34:02 *
*
*
* Warehouse . : KA KIM TEST WHSE Location: KARCV
*
*
*
*
*
* Item Description T Ref Quantity Date Lot
*
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 U 64 100.000 9/21/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
* F100 FINISHED ITEM 100 Y .000 9/23/93
1472583690 *
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom *
*
*
*F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel F24=More Keys
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Location History Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
Displays the warehouse selected for inquiry.
Description (30,A):
Displays the description of the warehouse selected for inquiry.
Location (6,A):
Displays the location for each inventory record matching
15/08/17 Page
396
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
selection criteria.
Item (15,A):
Displays the item number for each inventory record matching
selection criteria.
Description (12,A):
Displays the short form of the description of the item for each
inventory record matching selection criteria.
T (Transaction Code) (1,A):
Displays the Transaction Code for each record matching
selection criteria.
Ref (Reference Number) (,):
Displays the Reference Number for each record matching
selection criteria.
Quantity (11,3):
Displays the quantity for each transaction record matching
selection criteria. This figure is expressed in units of the
item.
(Transaction) Date (6,0):
Displays the transaction date for each inventory record
matching selection criteria.
Lot (10,A):
Displays the lot number for each inventory record matching
selection criteria.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Location History Panel
F14=Delivery Inquiry
Displays WHM300-01, Delivery Inquiry-Selection panel.
15/08/17 Page
397
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F16=Material Status Inquiry
Displays INV300-02, Material Status Inquiry panel.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
398
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Load Status Inquiry
The Load Status Inquiry (WHM320) selection allows inquiry into
the load status file. This allows tracking of loads throughout
the system. The inquiry program consists of two panels.
ACCESS: Warehouse Management Main Menu (WHM)
15/08/17 Page
399
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Load Status Inquiry - WHM320-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM320-01 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Load Status Inquiry USER
HH:MM:
*
*
* Type desired selection criteria, press Enter.
*
*
*
* Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 +
*
*
*
* Load Number . . . . . . . . . . . +
*
*
*
* Ship Date . . . . . . . . . . . . 0/00/00 To 99/99/99
*
*
*
* Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ______ To 999999
*
*
*
* Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . ______ To 999999
*
*
*
* Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . _
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Load Status Inquiry Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Warehouse (WINIWM)
* Load Number (WINIPLD)
15/08/17 Page
400
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Load Status Inquiry Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
(Press F4 to access pop up window.) Enter a valid warehouse
code to confirm movements within.
Load Number (6,0):
(Press F4 to access pop up window.) Optional. Enter a valid
load number (if known), to allow inquiry of loads held against
this load number.
From/To Ship Date (6,0):
Optional. Enter the valid From/To Dates to be used as a values
when compared against each load's ship dates.
From/To Route (6,A):
Optional. Enter the From/To Route Codes to be used as values
when compared against each load's route codes.
From/To Carrier (6,A):
Optional. Enter the From/To Carrier Codes to be used as values
when compared against each load's carrier codes.
Status (1,A):
Optional. Enter a status code to compare against each load's
status.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Load Status Inquiry Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
401
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Load Status Inquiry - WHM320-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM320-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/20/93 *
* Load Status Inquiry SCHLAG
15:37:13 *
*
*
* Warehouse . . . : WS
*
* Ship Date . . . : 0/00/00 To 99/99/99 Status . . . . :
*
* Route . . . . . : To 999999
*
* Carrier . . . . : To 999999
*
* Ship
Ship Shp *
* Load Consol Units Route Carrier Date Cust
To Sts *
* 4 800627 25.000 RTE66 9/03/93 6094
3208 P *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bottom *
* F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Load Status Inquiry Panel
Warehouse (2,A):
The warehouse code entered on the first panel (WHM320-01) is
displayed.
From/To Ship Date (6,0):
Displays the from and to ship dates entered on (WHM320-01).
15/08/17 Page
402
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
From/To Route (6,A):
Displays the from and to routes entered on (WHM320-01).
From/To Carrier (6,A):
Displays the from and to carriers entered on (WHM320-01).
Status (1,A):
Displays the status entered on the first panel (WHM320-01).
Load (6,0):
Displays the load number associated with this picking load
record.
Consolidation Number (6,0):
Displays the consolidation number associated with this picking
load record.
Units (13,3):
Displays the quantity of storage level 5 units (Example: Units)
associated with this picking load record.
Route (6,A):
Displays the route associated with this picking load record.
Carrier (6,A):
Displays the carrier associated with this picking load record.
Ship Date (6,0):
Displays the ship date associated with this picking load record.
15/08/17 Page
403
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Customer (6,0):
Displays the customer associated with this picking load record.
Ship-To (4,0):
Displays the ship-to number of the customer to whom this load
is scheduled to be delivered.
Ship Status (1,A):
Displays the status of each picking load record.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Load Status Inquiry Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
404
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Post-Ship UPI Confirmation
This panel is presented after a Post Ship sale is entered for a
location that records pallet level details. The Post-Ship UPI
Confirmation (WHM601) program allows the pallet level inventory
to be matched to the Lot/Location inventory.
*************************************************************************
*******
* WHM601-01 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/14/93*
* SSAUSCH0 WHM Post Ship UPI Selection SCHLAG
11:16:59*
*
*
* Order No. : 800831 Line No. : 1 Lot :
*
* Product : K100 Location : KARCV Alloc Qty :
10.000*
*
*
* UPI Number Quantity Avail Quantity Sel
*
* 28 10.000 .000
*
* 29 10.000 .000
*
* 30 10.000 .000
*
* 31 10.000 .000
*
* 32 10.000 .000
*
* 33 10.000 .000
*
* 34 10.000 .000
*
* 35 10.000 .000
*
* 36 10.000 .000
*
* 37 10.000 .000
*
* 38 10.000 .000
*
* 39 10.000 .000
*
* 40 10.000 .000
*
* 41 10.000 .000
+ *
*
*
* F1=Help F6=Accept
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - WHM Post-Ship UPI Selection Panel
Quantity Selected (11,3):
Enter the quantity sold against each pallet in the location.
15/08/17 Page
405
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - WHM Post-Ship UPI Selection Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
406
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Material Status Inquiry
This program (INV300) allows you to view the Material Status
Inquiry for specific items. This inquiry includes item header
information such as item class, type, and units of measure.
Quantities on hand, allocated, on order, and available are
taken directly from the Item Master file, and are stated in the
item's stocking unit of measure.
The remainder of the inquiry panel contains MTD and YTD totals
for the item's inventory transactions (issues, receipts, etc.).
15/08/17 Page
407
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Material Status Inquiry Panel - INV300-01
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV300-01 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/06/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Material Status Inquiry SCHLAG
10:35:25 *
*
*
* Item Number B2200/910410 +
*
* Facility CH + ( Blank for all )
*
*
*
* Description
*
*
*
* If Item Number is Blank, Alpha Search will be Called
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Material Status Inquiry Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Item Number (WINIIM)
* Facility (WINZMF)
15/08/17 Page
408
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Material Status Inquiry Panel
Item Number (15,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the item number for
which you want to view this inquiry. If you leave this field
blank, BPCS displays the Item Alpha Lookup (INV350). From
there, you can select an item for the inquiry.
Facility (2,A):
(Press F4 to access the pop-up window.) Key the facility code
for which you want to view this inquiry, or leave blank for all
facilities.
Item Description (30,A):
To view and select from a list of items by item description,
key the item's description or a partial description WITHOUT
specifying an item number in the Item Number field above. BPCS
displays the Item Alpha Lookup (INV350), from which you can
select the item number you want.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Material Status Inquiry Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
If you are continuing with the Material Status Inquiry from
panel INV300-01, BPCS displays the Item Summary panel
(INV300-02). The information on this panel is retrieved from
the Item Master file for the selected item. If the item is
purchased, the vendor item number is retrieved from the Vendor
Quote file (HQT).
15/08/17 Page
409
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Material Status Inquiry Panel - INV300-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV300-02 *** System Software Associates, Inc.*** WSID
MM/DD/
* CPU Material Status Inquiry USER
HH:MM:
* PART B2200/910410 + WD-0100.00-0110.00-WIND-2SN On Hand
.000 *
* Fac CH + U/M Sales EA U/M Purch EA U/M Stock EA Cust Alloc
1.000 *
* Class 21 Group Yield % 100.00 Mfg Alloc
.000 *
* Type F FINISHED GDS Draw/Form No On Order
.000 *
* Available
1.000- *
* MTD YTD
*
* Opening Balance .000 Lot Size Std
1.000 *
* Issues .000 .000 Std Batch Size
1.000 *
* Receipts .000 .000 Daily L/T Rate
*
* Adjustments .000 .000 Fixed Lead Time Days
*
* Sales Units .000 .000 Var Lead Time
*
* Sales Amt .00 .00 Order Policy A
Discrete *
* List/Catalog Horizon Days
*
* List Price 151.137 Period Order Days
*
* Std Cost 137.39733 MRP/MPS code Buyer
Code B *
* Actual Cost Vendors Vendors Item No
*
* Discount Code
*
* Pur U/M Cnv 1.00000 Planner
Code P *
* Sales U/M Cnv 1.00000
*
* Minimum Balance
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F19=Locations F24=More Keys
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
HEADER Field Descriptions - Material Status Inquiry Panel
Depending on your selections on the previous panels, the values
in the display fields on this panel may be retrieved from the
following files:
* Item Master (IIM),
* Order Lines (ECL),
* Warehouse Inventory (IWI),
* Purchase Orders (HPO),
* Material Allocations for shop orders (FMA),
15/08/17 Page
410
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
and
* Shop Orders (FSO),
NOTE: If lots are used, the on hand balance may be different
depending upon the following:
On Hand (11,3):
The item line detail totals that appear in MRP300 may not match
the totals listed on this panel. Two types of lots account for
the difference between the totals:
* Expired lots
* - Are listed in the Item Master
* - Are NOT listed in MRP
* Quarantined lots
* - Are listed in the Item Master
* - Are NOT listed in MRP
Vendor's Item Number (15,0)
If the item is purchased, the vendor item number is retrieved
from the Vendor Quote file (PUR150). The vendor's item number
is the number by which the vendor identifies this item.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Material Status Inquiry Panel
F19=Locations
Displays location and lot inventory detail.
F20=Whse
Displays the warehouse inventory for this item.
F21=History
Displays transaction history on this item.
15/08/17 Page
411
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F22=Orders
Displays panel INV300-03: open orders and allocations sequenced
by date (oldest first).
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
412
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Material Status Inquiry - INV300-03
This panel provides a date-sequenced view of all orders for the
selected item. As orders are displayed in date sequence, BPCS
calculates a running "projected" on-hand balance by assuming
that the order affects stock on the given date. The yield
percentage for the item is also factored into the projected
balance.
The fields in the second half of the panel are display fields
only. The values displayed in those fields represent the orders
for this item:
ORDER TYPE FUNCTION ON DATE
A Allocation: subtracts from
inventory needed on
shop order
B Without creates invoice
By/Co-Product Order
C Customer Order subtracts from requested ship
inventory
P Purchase Order adds to inventory due date
Q Requisition creates purchase order adds to
inventory
R Resupply Order ships from one whse
to another -like
customer order for
'ship-from' whse and
purchase order for
'ship-to' whse
S Shop Order adds to on-hand order due
The quantities for purchase orders and shop orders are the
remaining and open quantities multiplied by the item yield
percentage. The calculation represents a running
balance-forward of the projected inventory on hand.
15/08/17 Page
413
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV300-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2198S1
10/11/9
* SSAUSCH0 Material Status Inquiry SCHLAG
16:24:4
* PART B2200/910410 + WD-0100.00-0110.00-WIND-2SN Facility CH +
* Filters Order Type (A,B,C,P,Q,R,S) Whse + *ALL
* On Hand
.000
* Group U/M Sales EA U/M Purchase EA Cust Alloc
1.000
* Class 21 U/M Stock EA Yield % 100.00 Mfg Alloc
.000
* Type F FINISHED GDS Draw/Form No On Order
.000
* Type Order No Whse Original Remain Date Proj On
Hd
* CUST 910410 WD 1.000 1.000 9/23/93
1.000-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F8=Forward F24=More Keys
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Material Status Inquiry Panel
Order Type (1,A):
Key one of the following order type codes to view the inquiry
for a specific order type. The available codes are:
* A = Allocation
* B = Without By/Co Product Orders
* C = Customer Order
* P = Purchase Order
* Q = Requisition
* R = Resupply Order
* S = Shop Order
15/08/17 Page
414
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Warehouse (2,A):
Key the warehouse code for which you wish to view the inquiry.
To include information pertaining to all warehouses, leave this
field blank.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Material Status Inquiry Panel
F10=Customer Allocation
Displays customer allocations (ORD720).
F11=Fold
Folds the panel and display the reference text which
accompanies the particular type of order on this line:
* Customer order Customer name
* Resupply order Resupply warehouse
description
* Shop order Work center description
F14=Customer Order Entry
Displays customer orders (ORD300).
F15=Shop Allocation
Accesses Lot/Location Allocation/Inquiry (SFC720).
F16=Shop Order Inquiry
Accesses Shop Order Inquiry (SFC300).
F17=Purchase Inquiry
Accesses Purchase Order Inquiry (PUR300).
F19=Locations
Displays the lot/location detail panel (INV300-04).
15/08/17 Page
415
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F20=Warehouse
Displays Material Status Inquiry by Warehouse (INV300-06).
F21=History
Displays the transaction history panel (INV300-05).
F24=More keys
Displays additional function keys.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
416
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Material Status Inquiry Panel - INV300-04
This panel provides summary stock levels for the lot/location
level of item inventory. The panel displays one line for each
lot / location / warehouse combination, sequenced by warehouse,
lot number and location. If lots or locations are not used,
they display as blanks.
A pop-up window graphically displays quantity on hand for each
location in this warehouse. Lot numbers are included for
lot-controlled items.
The OPEN BAL, ISSUES, RECEIPTS and ADJUSTMENTS are defined
above. The ALLOCATED column is stock committed to production OR
customer orders (outgoing). The quantity AVAILABLE = ON HAND -
ALLOCATED.
15/08/17 Page
417
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV300-04 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/06/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Material Status Inquiry SCHLAG
11:23:39 *
* Item B2200/910410 + WD-0100.00-0110.00-WIND-2SN Facility CH +
*
* Filter Warehouse + *ALL
*
* On Hand
.000 *
* Group U/M Sales EA U/M Purchase EA Cust Alloc
1.000 *
* Class 21 U/M Stock EA Yield % 100.00 Mfg Alloc
.000 *
* Type F FINISHED GDS Draw/Form No On Order
.000 *
* Lot Whse/Loc Issues Receipts Adjusts On Hand Alloc
Avail *
*
*
* No Records Found
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F8=Forward F24=More Keys
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Material Status Inquiry Panel
F5=Refresh
Restarts at the first lot or warehouse.
F8=Forward
Rolls forward, displaying additional records.
F10=Alloc
Displays customer allocations on panel ORD720.
F11=Fold
Folds the panel and displays additional information.
15/08/17 Page
418
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F14=Pall/Cont
Displays Pallet/Container information.
F15=Shop Alloc
Displays shop order allocations on panel SFC720.
F18=Bar Graph
Displays a bar graph of the information.
F20=Warehouse
Displays Material Status Inquiry by Warehouse (INV300-06).
F21=Hist
Displays the transaction history panel (INV300-05).
F22=Orders
Displays all current orders for the specified item on panel
INV300- 03.
F24=More Keys
Displays additional function keys.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
419
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Material Status Inquiry Panel - INV300-05
This panel displays all inventory transactions for the month.
Transactions are displayed in reverse date sequence (latest
transactions appear first). The running balance shows the
inventory on-hand after the transaction took place.
This provides a date sequenced view of all BPCS inventory
transactions. The most current data is displayed first: rolling
takes you back historically. The date displayed is the input
"transaction" date, not the actual date of the transaction.
History is kept on line for the number of days defined on the
Transaction History System Parameters panel (SYS824D-01). The
Inventory Month End Close program (INV900) purges the data.
NOTE: The panel is in arrival sequence, NOT date sequence for
auditing purposes.
The transaction descriptions are from the Transaction Effect
file, as defined in INV150. The reference number depends upon
the transaction type, as does the comment (see INV150).
You may filter the history panel by:
* Facility
* Tranaction Type to look at one transaction
type only
* Warehouse to look at transactions from ONE
warehouse, ONLY
* Start Date to look at transactions from a
specific start date
15/08/17 Page
420
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV300-05 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2198S1
10/06/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Material Status Inquiry SCHLAG
11:42:08*
* Item B2200/910410 + WD-0100.00-0110.00-WIND-2SN Facility CH +
*
* Filters Trans + Whse + *ALL Start Date
0/00/00*
* On Hand
.000*
* Group U/M Sales EA U/M Purchase EA Cust Alloc
1.000*
* Class 21 U/M Stock EA Yield % 100.00 Mfg Alloc
.000*
* Type F FINISHED GDS Draw/Form No On Order
.000*
* Trans Ref No Whse/Loc Quantity Date Balance Lot
*
*
*
* No Records Found
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F8=Forward F11=Fold F24=More
Keys *
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Material Status Inquiry Panel
F19=Locations
Displays the lot/location status detail panel (INV300-04).
F20=Warehouse
Displays the warehouse material status panel (INV300-06).
F22=Orders
Displays the orders and allocations panel.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
421
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Material Status Inquiry Panel - INV300-06
This panel displays all warehouses which currently have or have
had inventory for the specified item. The warehouses are
displayed in alphanumeric order according to warehouse code.
This panel displays the stock levels for this item in all
warehouses in the upper right corner of the panel header. In
the detail section of the panel, it displays the summary stock
levels for each warehouse in which this item is (or has been)
kept as follows:
RECEIPTS (Incoming) - ISSUES (outgoing) + ADJUSTMENTS
(implicitly incoming) + OPEN BALANCE ( total as of last month
end close INV900) = ON HAND BALANCE. (NOTE: The opening balance
is NOT displayed on this panel.)
In-transit Inventory: (used in DRP only): The quantity of
this item which is "in-transit," which means the item has been
shipped from one resupply warehouse and not yet received at the
second resupply warehouse.
NOTE: A negative in-transit inventory indicates that the
receipt quantity for resupply shipments is greater than the
shipment of resupply orders.
After "folding" the panel with Processing Option <F11>, the
following two additional fields are shown:
* Total Whse Alloc (Total Warehouse
Allocation): The total quantity of this item allocated by
warehouse (both customer and shop orders).
* Reference: The warehouse description.
15/08/17 Page
422
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV300-06 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/12/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Material Status Inquiry SCHLAG
15:54:20*
* PART B2200/910410 + WD-0100.00-0110.00-WIND-2SN On Hand
.000 *
* Fac CH + U/M Sales EA U/M Purch EA U/M Stock EA Cust Alloc
1.000 *
* Class 21 Group Yield % 100.00 Mfg Alloc
.000 *
* Type F FINISHED GDS Draw/Form No On Order
.000 *
* Wh Fac Issues Receipts Adjusts On Hand In
Transit *
* MW CH .000 .000 .000 .000
.000 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F8=Forward F11=Fold
F12=Cancel *
* F19=Locations F21=History F22=Orders
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Prompt Windows - Material Status Inquiry Panel
Press the F4 key to access windows for the following fields:
* Part (WINIIM)
* Facility (WINZMF)
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Material Status Inquiry Panel
F19=Locations
Displays the lot/location detail panel.
F21=History
Displays the transaction history panel.
15/08/17 Page
423
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
F22=Orders
Displays the Material Status Inquiry - Orders and Allocations
panel (INV300-03).
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
424
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
On-Hand Balance Window
This window (INV301) provides a graphic representation of
on-hand balance by lot/location within warehouse. Lot numbers
are included for lot- controlled items. Both bar graph and
numeric values are displayed.
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV300-04 * Version 4.0.02 Warehouse Management * PC2047S1
10/25/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Material Status Inquiry SCHLAG
9:06:00*
* Item 3001 BEEF1 STEW CANNED 32OZ 8/CASE Facility WD +
*
* Filter Warehouse WD + WEST DIST CTR-D1 FACILITY Zone
*ALL *
* On Hand
4421.000*
* Group 4509 U/M Sales EA U/M Purchase EA Cust Alloc
223.000*
* Class ES U/M Stock EA Yield % 100.00 Mfg Alloc
.000*
* Type E Draw/Form No 70-405-640 On Order
.000*
* Lot Whse/Loc Issues Receipts Adjusts On Hand Alloc
Avail*
*
*
* Display On Hand Balances
*
* Actions: 8=Position To
*
* Act Lot Whse Loc On Hand
*
*
*
* E1 BA0001
36.000 *
* E1 BA0704
96.000 *
* E1 BB0001
10.000 *
* E1 BB0003
8.000 *
* E1 BB0004
48.000 *
*
More... 3 *
* F1=Help F7=Backward F8=Forward F12=Cancel
*
*
*
* F18=Bar Graph F20=Warehouse F21=Hist F22=Orders F24=More Keys
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
Available Actions - On-Hand Balance Window
8 = Position To
Action 8 positions the data within the window.
* Type 8 before any displayed line item and
15/08/17 Page
425
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
press ENTER to move that line to the top of the window.
* Type 8 and any lot number (or partial lot
number), or any warehouse code, or any warehouse/location
combination, and press ENTER to move to that part of the window
selection. If you type a lot, warehouse or location code which
does not exist, BPCS positions the window at the closest
alphanumeric match.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - On-Hand Balance Window
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
426
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Cycle Count Worksheets
This program (INV310) selects the items which are due for cycle
counting. Items are selected based upon the limits you set in
the program. The last panel within this program (INV530 or
INV531) allows you to print the items selected.
NOTE: The panel displays the separate criteria used to select
cycle count worksheets depending upon the criteria you
choose: Item or Warehouse Location.
The criteria if you select "I" (Item) are: ABC code, item
class, and item number.
The criteria if you select "W" (warehouse/location) are: item
number, warehouse code, location, and lot number.
15/08/17 Page
427
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV310-01 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/12/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Cycle Count Worksheet Selection SCHLAG
16:49:39 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Select by Item or Warehouse Location (I=Item
W=Warehouse) *
*
*
* Item Criteria Warehouse Loc Criteria
*
* ABC Code Part Number
*
* Item Class Whse Number
*
* Part Number Location
*
* Lot Number
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Cycle Count Worksheet Selection Panel
Select by Item or Warehouse-Location (1,A):
Key an "I" or a "W" to designate whether the item selection is
to be by item or warehouse.
If you enter "I," BPCS selects items (from ALL
warehouses/locations) that are due for cycle counting and that
fall within the ranges specified on panel INV310-02. The
following reports are generated:
Daily Cycle Count Worksheet (INV530),
listing all items within the ranges selected on INV310-02, and
all items with negative on-hand balance regardless of selection
15/08/17 Page
428
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
range.
Previously Cycle Counted Items report,
listing all items which were previously selected for cycle
counting but whose cycle counts remain unposted, regardless of
selection range.
If you enter "W," BPCS selects items that are due for cycle
counting and that fall within the ranges specified on panel
INV310-03. The following reports are generated:
Daily Cycle Count Worksheet (INV531),
listing all items within the ranges selected on INV310-03, and
all items with negative on-hand balance regardless of selection
range.
Previously Cycle Counted Items report,
listing all items which were previously selected for cycle
counting but whose cycle counts remain unposted, regardless of
selection range.
The reports automatically include any item that has had a
negative On-Hand Quantity since its last cycle count. The item
is selected even if the On-Hand is no longer negative, and even
if the item does not fall within the ranges that you specify on
panels INV310-02 or INV310-03.
BPCS looks at the Cycle Count Flag field in the Location
Inventory file (ILI). If this field is "Y," the item has had a
negative on-hand and is included for cycle counting. The
programs that can set this flag are: INV500, INV510, and
BIL540. If the item's cycle count frequency in the Item Master
file is blank or zero, this item is NOT a cycle count item and
does not print on cycle count reports unless it has a negative
balance.
When an item is selected for cycle counting, the Sequence
Number field in the item's ILI record is updated. BPCS takes
the item's last transaction sequence number from the Item Master
file and puts it into the cycle count sequence number field of
the ILI file. This is important because it is used later during
Cycle Count Posting to determine if any inventory transactions
have been posted against this item since selection time.
15/08/17 Page
429
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Cycle Count Worksheet Selection Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
If you choose to select items by item number ("I") on panel
INV310-01, BPCS displays panel INV310-02. If you choose to
select items by warehouse code ("W"), continue to panel
INV310-03.
15/08/17 Page
430
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Cycle Count Worksheet Selection Panel - INV310-02
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV310-02 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/12/93 *
* SSAUSCH0 Cycle Count Worksheet Selection SCHLAG
16:57:47 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Lower ABC Code
*
* Upper ABC Code 9
*
* Lower Item Class
*
* Upper Item Class 99
*
* Lower Item
*
* Upper Item 999999999999999
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel F18=Interactive
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Cycle Count Worksheet Selection Panel
Lower ABC Code (1,A):
Key the lower and upper ABC codes to designate the range for
which to print this report. (Extreme values by default.)
The ABC classification code is a code that you define to
describe the average annual usage of an item. An ABC code is
used to set up different categories of usage, then process or
15/08/17 Page
431
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
report based on the different categories. For example, items in
the top 20% of annual usage are commonly given an ABC code of
"A," items in the next 30% are given a code of "B," and items
in the last 50% are given a code of "C." You may use as many
one-character ABC codes as you like, but too many codes may
cause confusion or minimize their usefulness.
Assign the ABC code in Item Master Maintenance (INV100) for
each item. The ABC Usage Report (INV220) shows the annual usage
in descending order for all items. This report helps you decide
the "break points" for ABC code categories.
The ABC code is an important tool for inventory management
through cycle counting. The purpose of cycle counting is to
make frequent counts of selected parts of your inventory, while
making less frequent counts of other parts. The ABC code lets
you identify the high volume items. These are important items
to watch closely ("high risk" items for book vs. actual
discrepancies).
Upper ABC Code (1,A):
Key the lower and upper ABC codes to designate the range for
which to print this report. (Extreme values by default.)
The ABC classification code is a code that you define to
describe the average annual usage of an item. An ABC code is
used to set up different categories of usage, then process or
report based on the different categories. For example, items in
the top 20% of annual usage are commonly given an ABC code of
"A," items in the next 30% are given a code of "B," and items
in the last 50% are given a code of "C." You may use as many
one-character ABC codes as you like, but too many codes may
cause confusion or minimize their usefulness.
Assign the ABC code in Item Master Maintenance (INV100) for
each item. The ABC Usage Report (INV220) shows the annual usage
in descending order for all items. This report helps you decide
the "break points" for ABC code categories.
The ABC code is an important tool for inventory management
15/08/17 Page
432
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
through cycle counting. The purpose of cycle counting is to
make frequent counts of selected parts of your inventory, while
making less frequent counts of other parts. The ABC code lets
you identify the high volume items. These are important items
to watch closely ("high risk" items for book vs. actual
discrepancies).
Lower Item Class (2,A):
Key the lower and upper item class codes to designate the range
for which to print this report. Extreme values by default.
Upper Item Class (2,A):
Key the lower and upper item class codes to designate the range
for which to print this report. Extreme values by default.
Lower Item (15,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers to designate the range for
which to print this report. Extreme values by default.
Upper Item (15,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers to designate the range for
which to print this report. Extreme values by default.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Cycle Count Worksheet Selection Panel
F18=Interactive
Executes the process interactively.
All other processing options perform standard functions which
are described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
If you choose to select items by warehouse code ("W") on panel
INV310- 01, BPCS displays panel INV310-03.
15/08/17 Page
433
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Cycle Count Worksheet Selection - INV310-03
Use this panel to limit the range of items to be selected by
warehouse/lot/ location range.
*************************************************************************
*******
* INV310-03 Warehouse Management Version 4.0.02 PC2047S1
10/12/93*
* SSAUSCH0 Cycle Count Worksheet Selection SCHLAG
17:21:03*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Lower Item
*
* Upper Item 999999999999999
*
* Lower Warehouse
*
* Upper Warehouse 99
*
* Lower Location
*
* Upper Location 999999
*
* Lower Lot
*
* Upper Lot 9999999999
*
* Lower Zone
*
* Upper Zone 999
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel F18=Interactive
*
*
*
*************************************************************************
*******
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS - Cycle Count Worksheet Selection Panel
Lower Item (15,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers, warehouse codes, location
codes, and lot numbers to designate the ranges for which to
print the cycle count worksheets. The ranges narrow the
15/08/17 Page
434
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
worksheets which are selected starting from the item number
level and proceeding through the warehouse, location, and lot
levels. In other words, by narrowing the item number range, you
immediately narrow all selections because only worksheets for
that item number range will be selected further.
Each item can be in more than one warehouse location. Locations
are maintained through INV170.
Each item can be in more than one location and lot. Lots are
maintained through INV130.
Upper Item (15,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers, warehouse codes, location
codes, and lot numbers to designate the ranges for which to
print the cycle count worksheets. The ranges narrow the
worksheets which are selected starting from the item number
level and proceeding through the warehouse, location, and lot
levels. In other words, by narrowing the item number range, you
immediately narrow all selections because only worksheets for
that item number range will be selected further.
Each item can be in more than one warehouse location. Locations
are maintained through INV170.
Each item can be in more than one location and lot. Lots are
maintained through INV130.
Lower Warehouse (2,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers, warehouse codes, location
codes, and lot numbers to designate the ranges for which to
print the cycle count worksheets. The ranges narrow the
worksheets which are selected starting from the item number
level and proceeding through the warehouse, location, and lot
levels. In other words, by narrowing the item number range, you
immediately narrow all selections because only worksheets for
that item number range will be selected further.
Each item can be in more than one warehouse location. Locations
15/08/17 Page
435
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
are maintained through INV170.
Each item can be in more than one location and lot. Lots are
maintained through INV130.
Upper Warehouse (2,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers, warehouse codes, location
codes, and lot numbers to designate the ranges for which to
print the cycle count worksheets. The ranges narrow the
worksheets which are selected starting from the item number
level and proceeding through the warehouse, location, and lot
levels. In other words, by narrowing the item number range, you
immediately narrow all selections because only worksheets for
that item number range will be selected further.
Each item can be in more than one warehouse location. Locations
are maintained through INV170.
Each item can be in more than one location and lot. Lots are
maintained through INV130.
Lower Location (6,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers, warehouse codes, location
codes, and lot numbers to designate the ranges for which to
print the cycle count worksheets. The ranges narrow the
worksheets which are selected starting from the item number
level and proceeding through the warehouse, location, and lot
levels. In other words, by narrowing the item number range, you
immediately narrow all selections because only worksheets for
that item number range will be selected further.
Each item can be in more than one warehouse location. Locations
are maintained through INV170.
Each item can be in more than one location and lot. Lots are
maintained through INV130.
15/08/17 Page
436
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Upper Location (6,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers, warehouse codes, location
codes, and lot numbers to designate the ranges for which to
print the cycle count worksheets. The ranges narrow the
worksheets which are selected starting from the item number
level and proceeding through the warehouse, location, and lot
levels. In other words, by narrowing the item number range, you
immediately narrow all selections because only worksheets for
that item number range will be selected further.
Each item can be in more than one warehouse location. Locations
are maintained through INV170.
Each item can be in more than one location and lot. Lots are
maintained through INV130.
Lower Lot (10,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers, warehouse codes, location
codes, and lot numbers to designate the ranges for which to
print the cycle count worksheets. The ranges narrow the
worksheets which are selected starting from the item number
level and proceeding through the warehouse, location, and lot
levels. In other words, by narrowing the item number range, you
immediately narrow all selections because only worksheets for
that item number range will be selected further.
Each item can be in more than one warehouse location. Locations
are maintained through INV170.
Each item can be in more than one location and lot. Lots are
maintained through INV130.
Upper Lot (10,A):
Key the lower and upper item numbers, warehouse codes, location
codes, and lot numbers to designate the ranges for which to
print the cycle count worksheets. The ranges narrow the
worksheets which are selected starting from the item number
level and proceeding through the warehouse, location, and lot
15/08/17 Page
437
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
levels. In other words, by narrowing the item number range, you
immediately narrow all selections because only worksheets for
that item number range will be selected further.
Each item can be in more than one warehouse location. Locations
are maintained through INV170. Each item can be in more than
one location and lot. Lots are maintained through INV130.
PROCESSING OPTIONS - Cycle Count Worksheet Selection Panel
All processing options perform standard functions which are
described in the SSA Run Documentation for this product.
15/08/17 Page
438
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
Cycle Count Worksheets
One of two print programs--INV530 (by item) or INV531 (by
warehouse)-- runs automatically from INV310. You do not select
a menu option. These cycle count work sheets are printed based
on the selections you make in the Cycle Count Selection program
(INV310). These work sheets are used to record the actual count
of inventory for each selected item.
One work sheet is printed for each item selected for cycle
counting. These work sheets provide space for your input from
the actual count. They also contain the following preprinted
information:
* Item number and description
* Warehouse, lot, and location
* (Cycle count) sequence number
* Last counted date
* Unit of measure
* Counter's initials and comments
If you requested worksheets by Item on panel INV310-02, the
following reports are generated:
Daily Cycle Count Worksheet (INV530),
listing all items within the ranges selected on INV310-02, and
all items with negative on-hand balance regardless of selection
range.
Previously Cycle Counted Items report,
listing all items which were previously selected for cycle
counting but whose cycle counts remain unposted, regardless of
selection range.
If you requested worksheets by Warehouse on panel INV310-03,
the following reports are generated:
Daily Cycle Count Worksheet (INV531),
listing all items within the ranges selected on INV310-03, and
all items with negative on-hand balance regardless of selection
range.
Previously Cycle Counted Items report,
15/08/17 Page
439
Warehouse Management BPCS Documentation
________________________________________________________________
listing all items which were previously selected for cycle
counting but whose cycle counts remain unposted, regardless of
selection range.
After the items are selected for cycle counting (INV310) and
the cycle count sheets are printed (INV530/INV531), perform the
actual physical count of some or all of the selected items.
Post the results to the inventory files.
You may not want to count a selected item in certain cases. For
example, perhaps you know that the actual and book values are
different. If you do not want to count a selected item, you may
clear it through the Clear Cycle Counts program (INV810).
Items which have been selected for cycle count due to negative
balances must be counter to be cleared from future cycle count
reports.